EE Raceway Modeling

Reference Guide

Document Number DPDS3-PB-200005B DPDS3-PB-200005C

Version PDS 7.2 PDS 7.2

Date February 2003 February 2003

Pages 1-594 595-643

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies.

Trademarks
Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. ACE, DBACCESS, DIALOG, DMRS, EE CMS, EE Power, EE Raceway, EE Schematic, EE Wiring Diagram, IGDS, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright
 1984-2003 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software — Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished — rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ About this Document ............................................................................................................ Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ Additional Information ......................................................................................................... General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. About the Reference Guide .......................................................................................................... Basic Workstation Skills .............................................................................................................. 2. Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................ Assumptions ......................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Upgrading the Workstation .......................................................................................................... Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. Databases ..................................................................................................................................... 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment ......................................................................................... Using the Electrical Engineer Menus ........................................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Enter ............................................................................................................................................. Product Menu ............................................................................................................................... Copy ............................................................................................................................................. Delete ........................................................................................................................................... Archive ......................................................................................................................................... Restore ......................................................................................................................................... Database Utilities ......................................................................................................................... RIS schema utilities .............................................................................................................. Update Project Schema .........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

17 17 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 27 28 29 33 35 36 39 40 42 43 44 46 48 50 51 52

3

_ _______________
Update Reference Schema .................................................................................................... 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment ......................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Design .......................................................................................................................................... Process ......................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. EDEN ........................................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. Entering Time in Batch Mode .............................................................................................. Report ........................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. Overview ............................................................................................................................... Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... Copy ...................................................................................................................................... Delete .................................................................................................................................... Undelete ................................................................................................................................ Purge ..................................................................................................................................... Rename ................................................................................................................................. Send ...................................................................................................................................... Receive ................................................................................................................................. Archive ................................................................................................................................. Restore .................................................................................................................................. Output ................................................................................................................................... 5. EE Graphics Interface Elements .................................................................................................. Start-up Sequence ........................................................................................................................ Screen Display ............................................................................................................................. EERWAY Command Menu Bar .................................................................................................. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment .................................................................... Identifying Elements .................................................................................................................... Working Units and Precision Key-ins ......................................................................................... Working Units in MU:SU:PU .............................................................................................. Precision Key-ins .................................................................................................................. 55 59 61 63 64 64 65 67 68 69 70 70 72 73 73 75 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 89 91 92 93 96 97 103 104 104 105

4

_ _______________
6. Workflow and Procedures ............................................................................................................ The Drawing Process ................................................................................................................... System Manager Setup ......................................................................................................... Drawing Setup ...................................................................................................................... Define Systems and Set Active Systems .............................................................................. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................ Set Symbology ...................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters ........................................................................................................... Set Propagation Parameters .................................................................................................. Place One-Line ..................................................................................................................... Propagation ........................................................................................................................... Sketch and Eden Modes ........................................................................................................ Manual Fitting Placement ..................................................................................................... Seamless Tubing Representations ........................................................................................ Databases ..................................................................................................................................... Reference Database ............................................................................................................... Project Database ................................................................................................................... Reports ......................................................................................................................................... Interference Detection .................................................................................................................. 7. Precision Input Form .................................................................................................................... View ...................................................................................................................................... Maximize/Minimize ............................................................................................................. Cancel ................................................................................................................................... Reject .................................................................................................................................... Accept ................................................................................................................................... Move/Move To Toggle ......................................................................................................... Display Fields ....................................................................................................................... Active Point Coordinates Display ........................................................................................ Justification Point ................................................................................................................. Height and Width .................................................................................................................. Construct Point ............................................................................................................................ Midpoint/Any Point on Segment ................................................................................................. Extend/Reduce Run ..................................................................................................................... Distance and Direction ................................................................................................................. Runtime Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8. Design Commands ....................................................................................................................... Commands ............................................................................................................................ Using the Design Commands .......................................................................................................

Table of Contents

107 108 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 117 118 119 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 125 126 127 129 129 131

5

_ _______________
When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Place One-Line ............................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Route Around Vessel ................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Insert RCP .................................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Rotate Cross Section .................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Drop Point .......................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Equipment Pointer .............................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Define Active Point ...................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters .................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Manual Fitting .................................................................................................................... Conduit Sizing ............................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ........................................................................................... Insert One-Line Vertex ................................................................................................................ Place Field Routed Raceway ....................................................................................................... Define Duct Cross Section ........................................................................................................... Place Stub Up ............................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ 131 131 131 131 132 134 135 136 138 138 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 155 156 160 161 164 167 169

6

_ _______________
9. Modify Commands ...................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Commands ...................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Modify Element Commands ........................................................................................................ Using the Modify Element Commands ................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Annotate Element ................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ................................................................................................................. Copy Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Clone Element ...................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Segment ...................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Vertex ......................................................................................................... Propagate Element ................................................................................................................ Edit/Insert Manual Fitting ..................................................................................................... Modify One-Line .................................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule ............................................................................................................ Combine Coincident RCPs ................................................................................................... Delete Duplicate One-Lines .................................................................................................. Delete Element ...................................................................................................................... Remove RCP ........................................................................................................................ Delete Fitting ........................................................................................................................ Remove One-Line Vertex ..................................................................................................... Minimize Joints .................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 177 177 177 177 178 179 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 198 204 207 209 211 212 214 216 217 219 220

7

_ _______________
Change System Parameters ................................................................................................... Modify Group Commands ........................................................................................................... Topics ................................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Group Commands ................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Define Group ........................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Copy Element by Group ....................................................................................................... Annotate Element by Group ................................................................................................. Clone Element by Group ...................................................................................................... Propagate by Group .............................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule by Group ............................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Add Systems Group .............................................................................................................. Replace Systems by Group ................................................................................................... Minimize Joints by Group .................................................................................................... Delete Element by Group ..................................................................................................... 10. Setup Commands ....................................................................................................................... Using the Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Raceway Defaults .................................................................................................................. Define System .............................................................................................................................. Define One-Line Type ................................................................................................................. Set Symbology Control ................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Symbology Control ...................................................................................................................... Set Text Defaults .......................................................................................................................... Set Conduit Sizing Attributes ...................................................................................................... Create Cell Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Create Cell Commands ......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ 221 223 223 225 225 225 225 225 226 230 231 233 239 241 243 244 245 246 248 251 253 255 255 255 255 255 256 258 260 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 270

8

_ _______________
Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Create Model Cell ................................................................................................................. Create Equipment Pointer Cell ............................................................................................. Create Drop Point Cell .......................................................................................................... Model Commands ........................................................................................................................ Using the Model Commands ................................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Lock Model ........................................................................................................................... Move Model Annotation ....................................................................................................... Unlock Model ....................................................................................................................... Annotate Model .................................................................................................................... 11. Runtime Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... Using the Runtime Setup Commands .......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type Parameters ......................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................................................................... Set Active System ........................................................................................................................ Propagation Setup ........................................................................................................................ Set Active Levels ......................................................................................................................... Display Element Information ....................................................................................................... 12. Utilities Commands .................................................................................................................... Using the Utilities Commands ..................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Toggle Construction Display On/Off ........................................................................................... Highlight Element by Sector/Word ............................................................................................. Highlight Sector/Word With Filename .................................................................................

Table of Contents

270 270 270 271 274 277 280 281 281 281 281 281 282 283 284 285 287 288 288 288 288 288 289 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 305 305 305 305 306 307 307

9

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID ................................................................................................... Highlight ASID ID With Filename ....................................................................................... Highlight Element by Link .......................................................................................................... Highlight Link With Filename .............................................................................................. Highlight Propagation Errors ....................................................................................................... Display Sector/Word Value ......................................................................................................... Display Element Type and ASID ID ........................................................................................... Display Link ................................................................................................................................. Display System and One-Line Type ............................................................................................ Active Coordinate System ........................................................................................................... 13. Database Commands .................................................................................................................. Using the Database Commands ................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ Report ........................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. 14. Raceway Processes ..................................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Batch File Option ............................................................................................ Unload Design ............................................................................................................................. Unload Sheet ................................................................................................................................ Cleanup Database ......................................................................................................................... Create Interference Envelope (default name) .............................................................................. Create Interference Envelope (given name) ................................................................................. 15. Eden Processes ........................................................................................................................... Compile EDEN Symbol ............................................................................................................... Delete EDEN Symbol .................................................................................................................. 309 309 312 312 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 325 326 327 329 331 332 335 336 338 340 342 344 347 349 351

10

_ _______________
Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN Symbol Library ......................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN User Functions .......................................................................................................... Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries ................................................................................................... Compress EDEN Symbol Library ............................................................................................... Extract EDEN Symbol From Library .......................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Extract EDEN User Function From Library ................................................................................ Edit EDEN Symbol File .............................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ 16. Integrated Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Integrated Commands .................................................................................................. When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Review PDS Attributes ............................................................................................................ Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.2 Reference PDS Model .............................................................................................................. Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item ................................................................................................... Options .................................................................................................................................. 16.4 Review PDS Clash ................................................................................................................... Parameters ............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Appendix B: Error Messages ........................................................................................................... System/Application Manager Information .................................................................

Table of Contents

352 353 354 355 357 359 361 362 363 366 367 369 370 370 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 374 374 375 375 377 415 417 422

Customizing ................................................................................................................................. EE Environment Variables ..........................................................................................................

11

_ _______________
Appendix C: EE Databases .............................................................................................................. 425 426 427 427 428 430 430 430 432 432 433 433 433 434 435 435 436 437 437 438 438 439 440 440 441 443 444 445 446 448 449 449 449 450 451 454 454 454 455 456 457 458 Relational Interface System (RIS) ............................................................................................... Database and RIS Procedures ...................................................................................................... For New Users ...................................................................................................................... Update Schema (create_db) Process ............................................................................................ Reference Schema - General Description .................................................................................... Default Attributes ................................................................................................................. Keys ...................................................................................................................................... Codelists ............................................................................................................................... Approval Status Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Cardinal Codelist Table ........................................................................................................ Drawing Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................... Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table ....................................................................................... One-Line Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................. RCP Type Codelist Table ..................................................................................................... System Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Three-Line Type Codelist Table ........................................................................................... Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Units Codelist Table ............................................................................................................. Vendor Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table .......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table ............................................................................ Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table ......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table ...................................................................................... Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table ......................................................................... Yes-No Codelist Table ......................................................................................................... Fitting Environment Rules .................................................................................................... Project Schema - General Description ......................................................................................... Updating Schemas ....................................................................................................................... Updating a Project Schema ................................................................................................... Updating Reference Schemas ............................................................................................... Schema Names ...................................................................................................................... Modifying the Reference Schema ................................................................................................ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ............................................................... approv_status ........................................................................................................................ away_part .............................................................................................................................. away_spec ............................................................................................................................. cardinal ................................................................................................................................. cond_body ............................................................................................................................. cond_fill_calc .......................................................................................................................

12

......................................................................... duct_spec ......................................................................................................................... one_line ........................................................................ ee_pseudo_cable ......................................................................................................................... cndsch_spec .................................................................................................. ee_pcbl_config .......................................................... manual_part .................................. tray_part .................... rcp ................_ _______________ cond_part ................................................... ee_system .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ee_pcbl_color ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ cond_spec ...................... tl_type ............................................................................................................................. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ............................................................................................ tl_subtype ....................................................................... ee_units .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... mscolumns ...................................................................................................................... cabsch_spec .................................................................................................... tl_qual ................................................................................................................................................................................. mscodelist .......... to_equip ........................................................................................................................................................ wway_part .................................. project ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ee_unique .................. drop_point ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. tl_fit_env ....................... panel ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ee_pcbl_volt ............................... ee_pcbl_size ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. pullbox ..................................................................................................................... light_fixture ........................................................................................................................................................ ee_yes_no ...... drop_point ................................................................................................................... drawing_type ..................................... vendor ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Table of Contents 459 460 461 461 462 462 463 463 464 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 467 467 467 468 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 476 477 478 478 479 480 480 480 481 481 482 483 484 484 485 487 487 489 491 491 13 ....................................................................................... ee_pcbl_code ......................................... mscatalog ....................................................................................................................................... to_support ................................................. rcp_type ........................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_insul ........................... ee_cond_x_area ..... envelope ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. tray_spec ....................................... wway_spec .................................................................................. ol_type ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... drawing .. drawing ....................................................... ee_graphic_only .....................................................

..........................................................................................................................................dat ..........................................dat ...................... report.................................................................................................................................................................................................... to_support ............................................................................................................ Symbol Processor File ......... Sample ........................................................... project ...... Appendix F: EE File Structure ..................dat .................... 14 .................................................................................................................... process........................................dat .......................................................... mscatalog .... panel ......................................................................... Appendix D: Specification ................................................................................................................................................................................ EE Nucleus File Structure ...... rcp ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... panel_to_drw .................................................................................................................... manager....................................................................................................................................... print....................................................................................... Update Reference Schema ............................................ straight ............................................................................. sys_to_drw .......................dat ....................................................................................................... mscolumns ................................................................... one_line ........................................................................................................................................... 492 492 493 493 494 495 496 497 498 498 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 504 505 505 507 507 509 510 512 513 513 519 520 524 531 531 533 534 535 536 537 Preparing the Specifications .................................................................. ol_to_sys .................................................................................................................................. Available Fittings .............._ _______________ duct_fill ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation ..... Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ fit_to_sys .................................................................................... rcp_to_sys ...... envelope ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ee_pseudo_cable ............................................................................... eden........................... ee_system ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... str_to_sys ........................................................................................................................................................ EE Raceway File Structure ..................dat ...................................................... rule_chk...... rcp_to_drw ....................................................................................................................unl Files .................................................................................................................................................................. fitting ........................................................................................

.................................................... Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) ................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files ............ Associated Software/Files ....................................................................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files ................................................................. Drop Table Form ............................................ Information Output: ................................... Create Schema Form ...................................................................... Information Output: ........................................................................... 15 ............................................................................................................... Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager ...................................cmd .............................................................. Information Output: ............................................................................................. Associated Software/Files ........................................................................................ Create Table Form .......................................................................... Alter Schema Form .............................. Set Form .................................................................. Alter Table Form ............ A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume ....................... Appendix J: Reports ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) ....................................................................................... RIS Report Processing .................................................................... Information Output: ....................................................................................................................... Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Table Information Form ................................................... Drop Schema Form ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ Data Definition Form ..................................................................................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files .............................................................._ _______________ Appendix H: alias.................................................................................................................................. Project Drawing List (drwlst) ............................................................. Schema File Form ...........cmd file ................. Table of Contents 539 543 545 545 547 547 547 547 548 548 548 549 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 552 553 554 555 556 556 557 557 558 559 559 560 560 Schema Information Form .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Information Output: ................ Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) .................................................................................... Appendix I: rway...............................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................. Appendix N: EE Configure ............................................................................................................. Glossary ........................................................................... EE Manager .......... 561 565 566 567 571 573 581 In this Appendix ..................................................................._ _______________ Appendix L: Appendix M: RIS Schema Definition File ......................................................................... Database Edit Functions ...................... Index .................................................................................................................................................................................. 16 ..................................................................................................................................................

com.S. Table of Contents Support For the lasest Support Services information. Alabama 35758 U. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph. Intergraph General Information All countries — 1-256-730-2000 Training Registration 1-800-766-7701 (U.intergraph.intergraph._ _______________ If You Need Assistance Intergraph Online Our web site brings you fast. If you are outside the United States.S. up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products. and direction.com/ppo/services/support.A. Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www. Our web address is: http://www. please call your local Intergraph office.) Mailing Address Intergraph Process. Intergraph Directory The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated.asp. convenient. 17 . If you are outside of the United States.intergraph.com.com. please call your local Intergraph office. services.S. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.

_ _______________ Documentation Contacts We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. let us know. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process. AL 35758 18 . If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed. Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison.

Information about MicroStation capabilities can be found in the following documents: MicroStation Reference Guide MicroStation User’s Guide Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate EE Raceway._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for Intergraph Corporation’s Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Modeling tm software package. modify. and Ingres. and an index. It is recommended that you work through the EE Raceway Modeling Course Guide to learn the basic concepts of the product. you should be familiar with a text editor. This document is designed as a reference. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific EE Raceway function. Knowledge of 3-D design systems is helpful but not necessary. appendices. a glossary. much of this document is devoted to a description of those commands. grouped according to function. Also. such as vi or EMACS. numbered sections. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. these include Informix. EE Raceway is a MicroStation graphics based software and lets you design. Because the design process is controlled by executing commands. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. and model electrical raceway systems in a three-dimensional environment. Oracle. 19 . Currently. Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for designers who have a working knowledge of the standard interactive graphics system. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. Related Documents/Products MicroStation  software is required to operate EE Raceway.

Lists the names and dates of the files in the current release. contact the Intergraph subsidiary or distributor from whom you purchased your workstation. contact your Customer Engineer or Sales Account Representative. Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. For international locations. Section 5 Section 6 Sections 7-16 Ordering Information To order documents: Within the United States. Describe the command groups and operating sequences of each command within the command groups. This includes information on the screen display._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Provides special notices to the customer. menus. and on-line Help. the files which have been modified are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. File Name readme. For a fixes release. This includes information on accessing the product and creating and manipulating product files. 20 . Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the EE Raceway software in the win32app\ingr\eerway directory. Provides installation instructions. Describe the product environment. Lists any exceptions made to the certification. forms.February 2003 Section 1 Section 2 Sections 3 & 4 Provides an overview of the product and the document. Describes the typical workflow using EE Raceway. Describes the graphics environment for the product.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version.

For example. or groups of related information. 21 . Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response. which requires an action be taken by the user. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. parameter name. or dialog box title. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. The text is placed in the viewing plane. phrases. For example. Bold Indicates a command name. which is an explanation of what the software is doing. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words. Key in original.rpt file. Choose File > Open to load a new file. For example.dat to load the ASCII file. For example. For example. The ASCII report is stored in the layout.

ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises. To press the Escape key. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators. then K.February 2003 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information. Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed. which map menu selections to key combinations. 22 . More information — indicates there is additional or related information. Need a hint — used with activities and labs. Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information.k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

In a dialog box. If you are using the Windows NT operating system. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field. Preface Double-click Type Key in 23 . Click Apply to save the changes. you would select items to define parameters. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. For example. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file.dat from the list box. In addition. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. Select the file original. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. After selecting an item. Select the line string to define the graphic template. Double-click on the file original. For example. To key a character string into a text box. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. then click Delete to remove it from the directory. you click the action you want to affect the item. For example. such as selecting toggle buttons. For example. Selecting does not initiate an action. right-button chord.dat to load it into the new surface._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action.

February 2003 24 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

You can also use EE Raceway models as background drawings for designs created in other PDS facility design disciplines. It describes the basic workflow for creating an electrical raceway model. Interference detection – Creates the raceway component interference envelope files for input to the PDS interference detection task. modify. 25 . Introduction 1. Separate sections outline the preparation and responsibilities for the system and/or application manager. provides descriptions of EE Raceway commands and processes. Introduction About the Reference Guide This document. Material takeoff – Extracts a list of material required to construct a raceway model. the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide._ _______________ 1. including: Model building – Uses either a centerline or a three-line component graphic to build a three-dimensional raceway model. EE Raceway serves a variety of general purposes. Introduction EE Raceway allows you to design. and model electrical raceway systems in a threedimensional environment.

February 2003 Basic Workstation Skills The following basic workstation drafting skills are necessary to use the EE Raceway Modeling product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . These and other skills can be learned in Microstation Training materials: Fit view Window area Zoom in & out File design Compress Update Toggle between virtual screens Turn views on & off 26 .

Oracle. You must be familiar with a text editor. EMACS. 2. Installation Instructions This section is an instruction sheet both for initial installation and for updating the workstation software. such as vi. or Notepad. You will need to consult individual documentation for these products for detailed information. and EE Raceway Modeling. If you are updating. The software covered includes baseline and application software. or Ingres. You must be familiar with the PDS Loader. Electrical Engineer (EE) Nucleus software. Download/Install Overview This chapter covers the following topics pertaining to installation/upgrading: Upgrading the Workstation Installation Procedure Databases 27 . Products will be used with any one of the following databases: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. On-line Informix._ _______________ 2. Installation Instructions Assumptions The following assumptions have been made in the writing of this section. all projects have been archived.

There are several things you must do before loading any software to your workstation. The chapter also outlines the basic workflow for database setup and refers you to appropriate database documentation. the workstation as server. it describes the applications software necessary for each of three possible configurations: the stand-alone workstation. A database can reside locally on each workstation. Based on these two setups. you have three options: — Placing both project and reference databases locally on each workstation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . First. you should load system nucleus software.February 2003 Upgrading the Workstation This section describes the loading procedure and details the software you will need to operate your system. — Placing both project and reference databases remotely on a server. you must select the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) you plan to use and decide where to locate it on your system. followed by system application software (including EE Nucleus). Additionally. — Placing the project database locally on each workstation and the reference database remotely on a server. and the server-client workstation. 28 . or remotely on a server. You must also know before beginning to download products that the order in which you load them is very important. followed by the EE application products. For the purposes of this installation.

This will invoke the product selection form. 1. Download/Install 3. follow these steps to download all of the desired products to a Windows NT/2000/XP system. connect to the drive on which the distribution software resides. Select Continue when the button is no longer inactive._ _______________ Installation Procedure This section’s examples assume that you are running the loader delivered with PDS. Select Continue to invoke the Intergraph Registration Data form. 2. including a valid serial number. The Continue button will remain inactive until a valid serial number has been keyed in. Double-click on setup. based on your system configuration. Pressing Enter will have no effect until all fields have been entered. This form expects your user name. 4. company. Installation Procedure 2. First.exe to invoke the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. or it may be on your local system. the loader delivered to stand-alone EE Raceway sites may vary slightly. Once you know what application software you need. and serial number (as delivered). This may be a networked drive. 29 .

you must provide the installation path. A message box will appear. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. you will be asked to select the Installation Type (local. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. Place an X next to the software you wish to install. If server is selected. 30 . Among other installation options that vary according to product. This will invoke the installation data form for each selection.) If client is selected. select OK.February 2003 5. you must provide the name of the server which will be hosting the session. select Load Components. This will return control to the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. you must key in the path to the location to which you want to install the software.) When all information has been provided. client. When all software to be loaded has been selected. and a local path to the icon associated with the software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or server). as well as path to the software on the server. If local is selected.

) 7._ _______________ Installation Procedure Select Yes to continue. This program group contains the EE Manager. Copy the ee. otherwise select No. EE Help. Before you can enter the EE environment. the EENUC (Common) program group will be created.cfg file found in the win32app/ingr/eenuc directory into another directory not in the EE or PDS structure. 2. The Reset command should always be used at this point to ensure that the environment variables in the display window are those that belong to the file you just selected. and EE Nucleus icons.txt. When the software has successfully loaded. and it needs to be placed somewhere that it will not be over-written when you next update the software. and not to a previously-selected file. 9. Double-click on the EE Configure icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. 6. Download/Install 8. you must set the environment variables in your ee. (Your login directory will be fine. you will need to set at least the following variables: 31 .cfg file that you copied in the earlier step. EE Configure. Set your user environment variables.cfg file. you will modify this copied file. Before executing the software. Use the browse command to locate and open the new ee. EE Readme. A message box will display that tells you which products are being loaded.

and no more changes are needed. select OK to save the modifications to the ee.February 2003 PROJECT_LOCATION EE_SCHEMA EE_REFDB DB_TYPE Select the variable to be set.cfg file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This will close the EE Configure utility. key the desired value into the Value field. To modify the value of that variable. After all variables have been set properly for your environment. 32 . This displays the current value and description for that variable. then select Set.

Create empty RIS schemas. Only after these entries are in the table will the user be able to update the project and reference database for use with PDS. — For information about accessing RIS Schema Manager. — See the section of this guide entitled Software Requirements for information about the RIS products. Download/Install 33 . Download your RDBMS product and the Relational Interface System (RIS) software. see your individual RDBMS documentation for installation instructions and general information about the product. 1.* file in the /usr#/informix/release directory for details about creating databases in ANSI mode. — You will do this through the EE Environment and the RIS Schema Manager product. Create new databases/upgrade existing databases. 2. See the RIS Reference Manual for information about this process or look in the RISNOTES*. Databases 2. Also. What follows is a very basic outline._ _______________ Databases This section provides an overview of the workflow involved in creating a database and schemas. — For information about using the RIS Schema Manager product. — Refer to the Software Requirements section for information on database location options. Select and install the RDBMS you will use. — Decide where on the system to locate your databases. see the section entitled Database Utilities in this reference guide. 4. and 202 for reference schema. — Informix users must create all databases in ANSI mode with this release. and you should consult your individual RDBMS and RIS documentation for detailed instructions on database setup. Also. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager in this reference guide or refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. In order for the EE Raceway project to integrate to PDS there must be two entries in pdtable_102 corresponding to type_of_rdb_data: 200 for project schema. see Appendix C of this reference guide or refer to your individual RDBMS documentation. — For detailed information about creating and updating databases. 3.

— See the Database Utilities section in this reference guide._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 34 . The Database Utilities section contains instructions for updating both project and reference schemas.February 2003 5. — You will use the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment to accomplish this. Update your project and reference schemas.

The Project Menu and other EE Environment menus provide easy access to all the product functions. When you key in EE. All EE drawings are organized by project. the Project Menu displays: 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) products are accessed through the Electrical Engineer (EE) form. To enter the Electrical Engineer form._ _______________ 3. click Electrical Raceway Environment on the main PD_Shell form. EE Environment A project is a group of related electrical drawings and their associated database which you create. 35 .

and then to select. the necessary information in the input fields in the input/output area. If you do not know the appropriate addresses. To turn off an active option.control the EE form. Options List . To edit information you key in to input fields.a list of options which require additional input or other selections before you can continue. check with your system manager. The basic procedure for using EE menus is first to select an option from the options list. select another option.for keying in or displaying data about a project. 36 . Listing Area . use standard EMACS commands. For some options you will need to know net addresses for the input data boxes.lists available project and design files Input/Output Area .displays messages from the software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or key in. Message Area .February 2003 Using the Electrical Engineer Menus The following areas make up the Electrical Engineer form: Menu Icons . These options can display additional forms or menus.

Summary The best way to familiarize yourself with the environment form and their functions is simply to practice using the available features._ _______________ Scrolling Through Listings The listing area in the EE form provides you access to the projects and design files you will manage using the available menu options. provide the necessary input. When a particular option is active. The menus will not allow you to perform illegal operations. and then select Confirm (√). the item you select from the listing area will display in the appropriate input field. you are not allowed to print a design file from the Drawing Utility form. 3. For example. When listings fill more than one page. You can monitor lengthy processes by reviewing the message area. EE Environment Cancel (X) exits the EE application entirely. 37 . operating or error messages will display in the message area at the bottom of the form. in any combination: Confirm (√) accepts the current form settings. and executes the active process. Message Area Once you have selected and confirmed a option. Remember that the basic procedure for executing a given process is to select a form option. Reset returns you to the previous form and cancels the current form settings. Using the Electrical Engineer Menus Icons There are three icons that can display on EE forms. The bar above the arrows indicates where you are in the listing. all of the available listings are currently displayed. If the bar fills the space above the arrows. you can scroll up and down the list using the scroll bar.

Database Utilities — Accesses EE Update Schema utilities and RIS Schema Manager. 38 . Archive — Archives EE project files to a floppy disk or network nodes. Restore — Restores archived EE project files from a floppy disk or network nodes. if there are more than one._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Project Menu Options The individual Project Menu options are discussed in the following sections: Create — Creates new EE projects. Delete — Deletes EE project files. Copy — Copies existing project files to new projects. — EE Product Menu — Displays (and allows you to select from) those EE applications that are loaded on the workstation. Enter — Accesses available EE applications and enters existing EE projects.

which itself can span multiple products. For information about creating a project schema. page 553 .prj extension is automatically appended to the project file name when you select Confirm (√). Your project name should have eight or fewer characters. You may also want to create a new project schema when you create a project. Select the Project name field. so you are not required to key in this extension. A . and key in the new project name. EE Environment Field Descriptions Project name — This field allows you to enter the project name in uppercase or lowercase letters. 39 . Create 3. Multiple files can exist within a single project. The Project name field displays below the scrolling area. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Create process. though uppercase letters are automatically converted to lowercase. Steps 1. 3. 2._ _______________ Create This option creates a project in which your design file(s) reside. see RIS Schema Manager. Select Confirm (√) to create the project. Select Create from the Project Menu option list.

Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. You can override the default selection by keying in another schema name. You can override the default selection by keying in the desired schema name. 40 . Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. and is the first step in entering the Electrical Engineer environment._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Project schema — This field is automatically updated with the project schema name associated with the selected project name.February 2003 Enter This option accesses a specified project. Schema password — This field accepts a password for entering the respective schema. This field may or may not display the password once it has been entered. You may also key project names into this field. Reference schema — This field is automatically updated with the reference schema name associated with the selected project name. if one has been defined. if they exist. Field Descriptions Project name — This field reflects the project name that is selected in the project listing area. depending on the setting of the appropriate Password Echo toggle. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_REFDB. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_SCHEMA. You will need to input the names of the project. the project and reference schemas. and the schema passwords.

3. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. see RIS Schema Manager. Identify the appropriate Schema password field. page 553 . Select Enter from the Project Menu option list. the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the Drawing Menu. Select a project from the listing area. EE Environment 41 . Enter Password Echo — This toggle controls whether or not the password is displayed in the respective password fields. leave these fields blank._ _______________ Steps 1. If no password was defined for the schemas. and key in a project name. 3. 2. if needed. The project listing displays. and key in the password. 4. Enter schema passwords if they were created for either schema. The EE Product Menu displays. The project schema (defaults to project name) and the current reference schema display automatically. For information about schema passwords. You can make modifications to these fields. Select Confirm (√). — OR — Select the Project name field.

The Design Menu displays. only the EE Raceway product is on menu. In this example. Steps 1. available for use. If only one EE product exists on your workstation.) 42 . Only the EE products you actually have installed on your workstation will be displayed on this menu. then the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the selected product’s Design Menu. (See the chapter entitled EE Raceway Environment for more information about the Design Menu. Select the desired EE application from the Product Menu form.February 2003 Product Menu The Product Menu form displays all of the available EE products on your workstation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Copy project to — Key in the destination project name. this cannot be the name of a project that already exists. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Copy process. and key in the new project name. 43 . — OR — Select the Copy project from input field. 4. Copy Field Descriptions Copy project from — Key in the source project name (or select it from the list). EE Environment Steps 1._ _______________ Copy This option copies all the files within an existing project to a new project. 2. 3. 3. Select Confirm (√) to copy the project. You cannot key in the name of an existing project in the Copy project to field. Select Copy from the Project Menu option list. Select the Copy project to input field. Select a project to be copied from the listing area. and key in a project to be copied.

44 . Steps 1. — OR — Select the Project name field. Select Delete from the Project Menu option list. and key in the project name. Field Descriptions Project name — Key in (or select from the list) the project to be deleted. Select the project name from the listing area. Select Confirm (√). 3. a warning displays indicating that you should drop the schema corresponding to the database contained within the project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2.February 2003 Delete This option completely deletes all the files and databases within an existing project. If a database exists in the project directory.

a warning displays indicating that you are about to delete an entire project. If a database does not exist in the project directory. For information about dropping a schema. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Delete process. EE Environment Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. see RIS Schema Manager. 45 . page 553 . while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function._ _______________ Delete Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project and its database. 3.

The path must exist on the remote node. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system to receive the project.February 2003 Archive This option stores an entire project and associated database on a network host or on a floppy disk. Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. The project name is appended to this path. 46 . Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the destination node. A password is required if you are using the TCP option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the destination node. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the destination node of the project.

EErc file. EE_USERNAME. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Archive process. 4. Select Confirm (√) to begin archiving.) When archiving using a floppy disk. Default values for the remote node name. using the global symbols EE_NODENAME. 2. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. and remote directory may be assigned in the user’s . Archive 3. (If you need more information about the .EErc file. Select the storage facility for your project files. Select Archive from the Project Menu option list. EE Environment 47 . Select the Project name from the scrolling area. user name. you must have a formatted floppy disk placed in the disk drive. 3. and EE_REMDIR. contact your system administrator. — OR — Select the Project name field._ _______________ Steps 1. and key in a project name.

Be sure to verify that archived project will not overwrite existing projects with the same name. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the project’s node of origin. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the node of origin. The project on the floppy will overwrite the project in your directory. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system from which to receive the project.) Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the node of origin. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. When restoring from a network. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. A password is required if you use the TCP option.February 2003 Restore This option retrieves an entire project and any associated database from a network or a floppy disk. When restoring from a floppy. 48 . you cannot restore a project that is currently listed in the listing area. You must delete or rename the current project to complete the restore process. you can restore a project that is currently listed in your listing area._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Restore 3. 2. Select Confirm (√) to begin restoring. 3. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. When restoring from a floppy disk. Select the Project name field. EE Environment 49 . Select Restore from the Project Menu. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. Indicate the storage location for your project. and key in a project name. 4. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Restore process. you must have the disk in the disk drive._ _______________ Steps 1.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Database Utilities options are described in detail in the following sections.February 2003 Database Utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager environment and the EE schema updating processes. RIS schema utilities Update Project Schema Update Reference Schema 50 .

Proceed through the necessary RIS Schema Manager processes. Consult your relational database management system (RDBMS) documentation for specific information about database installation. RIS Schema Manager. Steps 1. Before using this utility. page 553 . To access the RIS Schema Manager form. 51 . you must have an existing database and user name. With this utility you can create. drop. EE Environment Normally this is a procedure for a system or application manager. see RIS Schema Manager._ _______________ RIS schema utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager form. For more information. 2. select the RIS schema utilities option from the Database Utilities menu. page 553 supplies examples of Create Schema input for several RDBMSs. RIS schema utilities 3. and maintain project and reference database schemas.

if one exists. see EE Databases. set the toggle to Echo. page 425 . To display the schema password input. select the field and key in the name of an existing project schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. though doing so will slow processing time. Password Echo/No echo — This toggle defines if you want to display the schema password input. select the field and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. You can update the schema with multiple products. Schema name — Defines the project database’s schema name. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. To enter the password. To enter the schema name. 52 . Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name.February 2003 Update Project Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing project schema. For additional information about updating schemas. Application checkboxes – These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. Schema password — Defines the schema password.

Return to step 1. Sql and Cmd file — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. see Process.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. Select Confirm (√) to update the project schema._ _______________ You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. or Batch. select the field. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. Select the Update project schema option from the Database Utilities form. To change the displayed default files. Set up the form to meet your specifications. When Update project schema finishes processing. For more information about operating modes. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default)..EErc file. You can redefine the defaults by editing this .msg). and key in the desired filenames. page 64 . The Update project schema form displays: 2..EErc file. EE Environment 1. or export EE_CUSTOM_SQL and EE_CUSTOM_CMD for the customized SQL and command files. 53 . The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. it will display one of two message files to the screen: — If the schema is updated without errors. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining your input. The update process displays the message Processing . 4. and key in the full pathname for those files. Processing toggle — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. Background. 3. Update Project Schema Steps 3.

You can also access these message files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form. For more information. 6. the system displays an error message file (create_db. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update project schema form. page 89 . 54 . 5. using the Output option on the Utilities form.February 2003 — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. located in the current project’s /tmp directory. see Output.err).

_ _______________ Update Reference Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing reference schema. 3. see Process. Application checkboxes — These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. Processing mode — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. set the toggle to Echo. if one exists. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. and key in the desired filenames. To enter information. and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. For additional information about updating schemas. Schema password — Define the schema password. or Batch. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. To enter information. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. or export EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL and EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD for the customized SQL and command files. To change the displayed default files. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. Sql and Cmd File — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. Update Reference Schema Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. Schema name — Defines the reference database’s schema name.EErc file. select the field. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox.EErc file. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. page 64 . For more information about operating modes. and key in the name of an existing reference schema. and key in the full pathname for those files. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. Password Echo/No echo — This toggles define if you want to display the schema password. Background. EE Environment 55 . select the field. see EE Databases. To display the schema password input. page 425 . select the field. though doing so will slow processing time. You can update the schema with multiple products.

The Update reference schema form displays.. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When Update reference schema finishes processing. 3. the system displays an error message file (create_db. Return to step 1. Select Confirm (√) to update the reference schema. The update process displays the message Processing . 4.msg). 56 . — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining the form parameters. — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. Set up the form to meet your specifications.err). the system displays a processing message file (create_db. — If the schema is updated without errors. Select the Update reference schema option from the Database Utilities form. it will display one of two message files..February 2003 Steps 1.

_ _______________

Update Reference Schema

You can also access these message files, located in the current project’s /tmp directory, using the Output option on the Utilities form. For more information, see Output, page 89 . 5. 6. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update reference schema form. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form.

3. EE Environment

57

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

58

_ _______________
4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment
When you select the Enter option from the Project Menu, one of two menus display: The EE Environment Product Menu, if you have multiple EE products installed on the workstation (see Product Menu, page 42 for more information). — OR —

Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment

The EE Raceway Design Menu.

4. EERWAY Environment

The rest of this chapter describes all the options on this menu. If you are a new user, you may want to skip all but the Create and Design options.

Commands
The following sections describe each option in detail and show the menu as it displays when each option is selected. Create — Allows you to create a design file.

59

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Design — Allows you to enter a design file and attaches the EE menus. Process — Allows you to list and select EE Raceway processes. It also processes work on design files and/or databases. EDEN — Allows you to design your own symbols for raceway elements. Report — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Rule — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Utilities — Allows you to access functions needed to manipulate EE Raceway design, rule, report, and message files.

60

_ _______________
Create
This option creates design files, based on a specified seed file.

Create

When you create a drawing, you are actually copying a seed file (a template). The seed file contains basic information that EE Raceway uses. A seed file can also contain customized information like company borders and logos. EE Raceway is delivered with both a metric (mseed.dgn) and English seed file (seed.dgn). You can also use seed files that were generated in a Plant Design (PDS) environment. EE Raceway will convert PDS seed files to raceway design files the first time you enter the EE Raceway graphics environment.

4. EERWAY Environment

Steps
1. Select Create from the Design Menu. If there is only one seed file, it is displayed as the default. If there is more than one seed file available, the listing area displays all these files. By default, the seed file subdirectory is win32app\ingr\eerway\dgn\seed. You can change this directory by redefining the EERWAY_SEED symbol in the directory or in your login directory. 2. Select the seed file. Choose a seed file either by accepting the default (this happens automatically when you select Confirm (√)) or by selecting a seed file from the scrolling area. 3. Select the drawing name input box and key in a drawing name and, optionally, a file extension.

61

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 A file extension of .dgn is automatically appended to the drawing name if you do not enter your own file extension. 4. Select Confirm (√). The drawing name and its file extension become the filename of the drawing. The drawing is added to the active project. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Create process.

62

_ _______________
Design
This option accesses the graphics environment, taking you into a specified existing design file.

Design

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Design from the Design Menu. Select the drawing name from the listing area. Select Confirm (√). The system invokes the graphics environment. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Design process.

4. EERWAY Environment

63

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Process
This option accesses all available EERWAY processes. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database.

Overview
This section provides general information about running all processes. See Raceway Processes, page 331 for more information about individual processes. The screen above lists the processes currently delivered with the product. The system manager can add or delete processes from the list by modifying the process.dat file in win32app\eerway\data.

64

_ _______________
When you enter a specific process, an input screen displays.

Process

You must key in any information not already shown as defaults. You can override default values by keying in your own information. All drawings are displayed on the screen scrolling area. An asterisk (*), when placed in the Enter Drawing Name input field, is a wild card character which can be used to list a subset of your drawings. For example, if you enter a*, all drawings beginning with the letter "a" will be displayed. The ? character can also be used as a wild card for a single character. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to execute the process.

Operating Modes
The Processing toggle allows you to select the operating mode for a process. The default mode is Foreground, but you can toggle between that option and the Background and Batch options. A process in Foreground runs immediately, and you do not regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the same window in which you are running the process. A process in Background runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in Batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

4. EERWAY Environment

65

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Entering Time in Batch Mode
If you select Batch mode, an input box displays, allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the process to run. The time can be entered as 1, 2 or 4 digits. One- and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours, four digits to be hours and minutes. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). The suffix AM or PM may be appended; otherwise, a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. The system also recognizes the names NOON, MIDNIGHT, NOW and NEXT. Optionally, you can specify a date using either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). The system recognizes the words TODAY and TOMORROW. If you input no date, the system assumes it should run the job TODAY if the specified hour is greater than the current hour, and TOMORROW if the specified hour is less than the current hour. Legitimate commands include:

0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Process from the Design Menu. Select a process from the listing area. Select Confirm to invoke the input form for the specified process. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Process option.

66

_ _______________
EDEN
The following screen displays the Eden options delivered with this version of EE Raceway. The system manager can add or delete displayed options by modifying the eden.dat file.

EDEN

Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for straights, fittings, and special parts.

This section provides general information about running all Eden program options. For detailed information about individual Eden options, see Eden Processes, page 347 .

4. EERWAY Environment

67

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 When you select an option from the Eden menu (and confirm the selection using Confirm (√)), an input screen displays.

You must key in all information not displayed as defaults. If necessary, you can override the default values that already display, and key in your own information. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to begin the option process.

Operating Modes
A box on the right side of the menu allows you to select the operating mode for the selected option. The default mode is foreground. The circular arrow on the right indicates that this box leads to other selections. These selections are the three methods of running an option: foreground, background, and batch. An option in foreground mode runs immediately, and you cannot regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the window in which the option is running. An option in background mode runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

68

otherwise. an input box displays. The system accepts the words TODAY and TOMORROW. allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the option to begin processing. a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. it will run the job TODAY._ _______________ Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select batch mode. NOW and NEXT are also recognized. MIDNIGHT. it will run the job TOMORROW. The special names NOON. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday 4. EDEN The time can be entered as 1.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. If you input no date. EERWAY Environment 69 . One. the system assumes that if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. You can specify an optional date in the form of either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (spelled in its entirety or abbreviated to three characters). 2 or 4 digits. and if the specified hour is less than the current hour. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). four digits to be hours and minutes.

See Reports._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports.February 2003 Report This option accesses the standard EERWAY reports. You must load the project database before running any reports. 70 . The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports.dat file (win32app\eerway\data). These reports report on the project and reference databases.

EERWAY Environment 71 . Steps 1. 4. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. 2. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. Select Report from the Design Menu. an input screen displays._ _______________ When you process a report. You can change the name of the output file or error file. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Report option. select the output file box and key in a new name. Select a report from the listing area. you should name the output files yourself. You should give each report you want to save a unique name.) If you want to save reports throughout a project. the new file will overwrite that file. 3. Report Key in any information that is not supplied by default. To change the output filename.

These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction.February 2003 A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 72 . For instance. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction.

The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. 4. For more detailed information about each rule check. EERWAY Environment 73 . You must load the project database before running any rule checks. Overview This section contains general information about running all EERWAY rule checks._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This option accesses the standard EERWAY Rule Checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. page 545 .dat file in win32app\eerway\data. see Reports.

Steps 1. or change that information according to your specifications. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. an input screen displays. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Rule option.February 2003 When you process a rule check. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. 74 . If you want to save reports throughout a project. Select a rule check report from the listing area. Select Rule from the Design Menu. 2. you should name the output files yourself._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. 3. the new file will destroy the previously created file.

_ _______________ Utilities Utilities This option manipulates files within a project. Each column will list a different subdirectory. When you select Utilities from the Design Menu. All manipulations are performed on those files residing in the current project’s directories. the Drawing Utility Menu displays. 4. 75 . EERWAY Environment Files in the current project sub-directories will be listed in four columns.

screen. and error files generated by standard reports and rule check reports. (<project_name>/eerway/rpt) Rule (.All files output by Raceway processes. Archive — Archives a file to a network node or floppy disk. and then select the file(s) on which to perform that option. Restore — Restores an archived file from a network node or floppy disk. Purge — Purges (permanently deletes) a file.tmp) . Steps 1. Copy — Copies a file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .chk) . Send — Sends a file to a network node. Select Utilities from the Design Menu.All report files generated by standard reports.All drawings. Delete — Deletes a file (mark for purging). Undelete — Undeletes a file (unmark for purging). Commands The commands on the Drawing Utility Menu are described in their respective sections later in this chapter. 76 . 2. (<project_name>/eerway/tmp) Utilities options will operate on all of the above file types. or plotter. Select the desired option from the Drawing Utility Menu.February 2003 Drawing (. Rename — Renames a file. (<project_name>/eerway/chk) Message (. 3.All report files generated by rule checks reports. Output — Outputs a file to a printer. Enter necessary form information for the active option. Receive — Receives a file from a network node.rpt) . (<project_name>/eerway/dgn) Report (.dgn) .

— OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the active option. EERWAY Environment 77 ._ _______________ 4. Select Confirm (√) to accept the settings and execute the active option. Utilities 4.

Field Descriptions Copy file from — This field displays the name of the file to be copied. Copy file to — This field displays the name that the copy (destination) file will be called._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Copy This option copies an existing file to another file.rpt. and so forth) to the new file. key in a unique destination file name into this field.dgn. You must specify a unique filename for the destination file. elect a file from the list. . or key in the name of the file to be copied. 78 . Copy DOES NOT automatically append a file extension (.

EERWAY Environment 79 . but can be undeleted (that is. have access returned to them) until you actively Purge them. Note that files you delete with this option take up storage space._ _______________ Delete Delete This option removes your access to a specified file. To physically remove the file from the workstation. 4. you must select the Purge option.

you cannot undelete them with this option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Once you have removed files using Purge.February 2003 Undelete This option returns your access to a file that you removed using Delete. 80 .

Once you Purge a file. you can select specific files from the list by placing a data point on them. 4. you cannot recover it. To de-select a selected file._ _______________ Purge This option permanently removes all the files you marked for deletion using the Delete option. selected files that have been deleted. or no files at all. Purge Field Descriptions Purge Files toggle — This toggle allows you to choose between purging ALL files that have been deleted. When the toggle is set to Select files to purge. place a data point on it. EERWAY Environment 81 .

. It does not automatically append a file extension (._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or key the name into this field. Rename file to — Key in the name that you desire to rename the current file.rpt. You can select the file from the list.February 2003 Rename This option changes the name of an existing file.dgn. Field Descriptions Rename file from — This field displays the current filename. and so forth) to the new filename. 82 .

EERWAY Environment 83 . IGDS/No IGDS toggle — This toggle should be set to the IGDS setting when sending to a VAX system.dgn). TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to send the file. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to send the file. Doing so will store the file in contiguous blocks on the VAX. or key in the appropriate name. turn on the IGDS toggle. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the receiving machine. You can either select the desired file from the list. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be sent. test1. The password may or may not be visible in the field._ _______________ Send This option copies a file to a network node. Be sure to include the entire filename including the extension (for example. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. If you are sending a design file to a VAX. Otherwise. the setting should be No IGDS. 4. Send Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the remote machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field.

Also. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to receive the file. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be received. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the sending machine. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Receive will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are receiving. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. 84 . or key in the appropriate name. Be sure to specify the complete filename. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the sending machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. You can either select the desired file from the list. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to receive the file. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the sending machine. otherwise the file will be placed in the <project_name>/eerway directory.February 2003 Receive This option copies a file from a network node. including its extension. specify the local path to the file.

chk. tmp) — This field expects the path to the desired location of the file being received. EERWAY Environment 85 ._ _______________ Local path (dgn. rpt. Receive 4.

The password may or may not be visible in the field. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. Toggle between Network and Floppy by selecting the toggle button.February 2003 Archive This option creates a backup copy of a file to a network node or to a floppy disk. see the description of Archive in Archive. 86 . For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 46 . Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the desired name of the archive file. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to archive the file. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to archive the file. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol.

87 . TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. page 48 . see the description of Restore in Restore._ _______________ Restore This option copies a backup file from a network node or floppy disk. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the name of the archive file to be restored. Use the Network/Floppy toggle to select between the two options. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to restore the archive file. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to restore the archive file. This option will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are restoring. Restore Field Descriptions 4. EERWAY Environment Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field.

The password may or may not be visible in the field.February 2003 Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the remote machine._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. 88 . Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine.

Field Descriptions 4. If you do not specify an output destination. Invalid operations – sending a drawing to the printer._ _______________ Output This option sends files to the printer. NQS options. 89 . plotter. or user programs may be added to support specific output requirements. the selection displayed at the top of the list is the default selection. The system manager may modify this file to add desired options. Local commands. Output Destination List — Select the appropriate output device.dat) controls the available output options. for example – are not allowed. EERWAY Environment File name — Key in the name of the file to be submitted to the output process. or select it from the list. Output An external data file delivered with the environment (win32app\eenuc\data\print. or laser printer. screen. IPLOT commands.

February 2003 90 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

If you are not familiar with the following terms: command button <C>. EE Graphics Interface Elements EE Graphics Interface Elements This chapter describes the graphics environment you will encounter while working in a design file. This chapter contains more detailed information about using menus. It also documents the on-line Help system and provides other general information needed to work in a design file. data button <D>. EERWAY Graphics 91 . 5. or reset button <R> in reference to the cursor or mouse._ _______________ 5. This chapter contains the following sections: Start-Up Sequence Screen Display EERWAY Command Menu Bar Palettes in the EERWAY Graphics Environment Identifying Elements Working Units and Precision Key-ins All of the EERWAY graphics commands are menu-driven. the panel menu is located on the right side of your screen and the bar menu is at the top. By default. You will use the panel menus and the bar menu to select the commands. see Document Conventions in the Preface to this document. You can also invoke commands by keying in the command name and pressing <Return>.

page 63 ). Displays a command window at the bottom of the screen._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Start-up Sequence When you enter an EERWAY design file (see Design. 92 . the system goes through the following processes: Displays all active design file views. Initializes RIS with the reference schema.

MicroStation Command Window . release the data button.cmds file. Only the Lower and Sink actions are available from the command window. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. To select an action. your screen display may be different._ _______________ Screen Display The screen display you will see when you enter a design file is described below. When the correct item highlights. EERWAY Graphics — Window Menu Button . Screen Display If you have modified the default application menu configuration file. as described in the previous section.) 1.contains the following six fields that display system messages and your inputs from the keyboard: 5.displays a list of window actions. (Check with your system manager if you have a customized rway. 93 .

All your design work occurs in the screen working area. 3. Select the type of command you want to use with a data point to see the pull-down menu of available commands or command palettes. Working Area . — Key-In Field ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .displays a system prompt that directs you through a command. — System Prompt Field .contains the primary types of commands used in the EERWAY graphic environment.displays elements as you place them.displays startup file information and product name. — Current Command Field . Command Menu Bar .displays the name of the current active command.moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type. 94 .displays alphanumeric values you enter from the keyboard. 4.provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design.February 2003 — Sink Box . The number and name of each view appears in the window title area. Windows . 2. — Command Status Field .

release the data button.collapses a window.deletes a window.provide ways to move and resize windows. Move . To select an action from the menu.moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy. Window Menu Button .moves a window around the workspace. Minimize Button .enlarges a window to its maximum size. If you select the maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size.provide ways to manipulate windows.enlarges a window to its maximum size.restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous size and location. Move Arrows . Press and hold the data button to change both the height and width of the window without changing the position of the opposite corner. the window is restored to its previous size and location.changes the height and width of the window in the direction indicated by the pointer. Horizontal Arrows . When the correct item highlights. the window is restored to its previous size and location. Maximize . Size .appear when the cursor is placed at the top or bottom border.collapses a window. Restore . Lower . Diagonal Arrows ._ _______________ Window Manipulation Buttons . Close . Resize Borders . Screen Display 5.appear when the cursor is placed at the left or right border. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. Press and hold the data button to change the height of the window as you move the cursor. Double-clicking on this button deletes the window. Press and hold the data button to move the window. Minimize .appear when the cursor is placed over the window border. If you select this entry on a window that is already at its maximum size.displays a list of window actions. Press and hold the data button to change the width of the window as you move the cursor. Vertical Arrows . Maximize Button . EERWAY Graphics 95 .appear when the cursor is placed at the border corners.

you can also access command palettes from these pull-down menus. Each keyword leads to a pull-down menu that contains commands for various EERWAY tasks. Exit . which allows access to the following commands: EERWAY Palette .Invokes MicroStation’s Compress Design command.Invokes the EERWAY command palette. Remove Palettes .February 2003 EERWAY Command Menu Bar The EERWAY command menu bar appears near the top of the MicroStation command window. Using the Command Menu Bar The command menu bar is a logical menu. Compress Design . Integrated Commands . place the cursor over the button and press <D>.Executes the File Design command. when applicable. 96 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .Invokes the Integrated Commands menu. and exits the graphics environment to return control to the EE Raceway menu interface. For instance. selecting File initializes the File pull-down menu.Removes all palettes that have been invoked. To select a keyword. Each keyword on the command menu bar allows access to a menu of options relating to that keyword. which allows access to the most frequently-used MicroStation commands.Invokes the Bar Commands palette. Bar Commands .

_ _______________ Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. 5. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. EERWAY Graphics 97 . then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window.

then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. 98 . then selecting Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.February 2003 Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu.

5. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. EERWAY Graphics 99 ._ _______________ Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu.

then selecting Palette. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window.February 2003 Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. 100 . then selecting Modify Group Commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Palette.

Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. 5. EERWAY Graphics 101 ._ _______________ Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette.

then selecting Palette. Database This palette is activated by selecting Database from the MicroStation command window.February 2003 Utilities This palette is activated by selecting Utilities from the MicroStation command window. 102 . then selecting Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the wrong element may highlight. one data point can serve more than one function in the same command. Identifying Elements 5. If the wrong element highlights. press <R> to reject that element. press <D> again to accept the element. For example. In many commands. The system highlights the element._ _______________ Identifying Elements Any structure. When you are moving an element. If there is more than one element in the location you want to identify. you must identify an element to perform certain manipulations. place a data point on it. To identify an element. Several of the command descriptions include steps where the accepting data point also serves as the placement point. EERWAY Graphics 103 . If the correct element highlights. the point you place to accept the element becomes the point from which the element is moved. or shape you place is called an element. line. The system then highlights another element.

we recommend that you use these default settings: Unit 1 Master Unit 1 Subunit 1 Positional Unit Imperial 1 foot = 12 subunits 1 inch = 8000 positional units 1/8000 inch Metric 1 meter = 1000 subunits 1 millimeter = 10 positional units 1/10 millimeter While these are the suggested working units for delivered cell libraries. Working Units in MU:SU:PU For Intergraph electrical designs. MU — Master (main) Unit of measurement (for example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The working unit dictates the degree of accuracy for placement of elements in a drawing and determines the scale relationship of elements in the design. 1 foot) SU — Subunit. You may set your working units to any desired value. if a user-created cell library is being used. EERWAY lets you key in values (called precision key-ins) as well as place data points. and Positional Units. called MU:SU:PU.) 104 . the smallest degree of accuracy that is possible in the design file (a fraction of an inch) In EERWAY. Precision key-ins let you accurately place elements by using a working units system based on Master Units. (See your system manager for more information about the working units settings used at your location. Subunits. Therefore. predetermined values for working units in imperial and metric projects were used to create the delivered cell library. you are not limited to using only them.February 2003 Working Units and Precision Key-ins When you place elements or manipulate them. also known as MU:SU:PU. a division of a master unit (1 inch) PU — Positional Unit. If using this cell library. are established based on the project type (metric or English). but placing data points does not always provide the accuracy you need. Working units are coordinate units corresponding to the position and definition of a point in the design file. The following explains the format of MU:SU:PU. the working units of measurement. you can often use data points. You must understand the MU:SU:PU system before you can use precision key-ins.

0. You specify a distance and an angle from the last point placed.5 (1/2 subunit) = :1/2 (1/2 subunit) = :0:4000 (4000 positional units) 18 inches = 1. 105 .5 (1/2 master unit) 1/2 inch = :. key in the distance in MU:SU:PU working units and the direction in degrees that you want the point to be placed. There are several ways to key in precision points. key in the delta x and delta y in MU:SU:PU that you want the point to be placed. direction) To place a precision point. if you want to place a point 18 inches over and 18 inches up._ _______________ Below are some examples of values and how to key them in: 1/2 foot = :6 (6 subunits) = . key in DX=1:6.5 (1-1/2 master units) = 1:6 (1 master unit and 6 subunits) Working Units and Precision Key-ins Precision Key-ins Precision key-ins let you place points accurately to create elements and shapes with exact lengths and areas. if you want to place a point 10 inches directly to the right. or you can specify the delta values in X and Y to place another point. Key-ins are entered through the alphanumeric keyboard.1:6. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. key in its absolute x and y coordinates. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. For example. DL= (delta coordinates) To place a precision point. For example. EERWAY Graphics XY= (absolute coordinates) To place a precision point. 5. key in DI=0:10. as described below: DI=(distance.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 106 .

Workflow and Procedures Workflow and Procedures 6. This includes setting up the design file._ _______________ 6. as an operator would typically use it. this section will refer you to other documentation wherever possible. Workflow This section describes the overall workflow of EE Raceway Modeling software. creating a raceway model. This section covers the following topics: The drawing process EE Databases Reports Interference detection Because the steps of the workflow are covered in detail elsewhere in the document. and running reports and processes on the file. page 415 . 107 . Preparation for the application or system manager is described in System/Application Manager Information.

These one-line drawings are the centerlines of raceways and through propagation become the threedimensional shapes (three-lines) that occupy the volume of the raceways. This section is divided into individual descriptions of the steps involved in the drawing process. it is important to describe basic raceway concepts. you should perform these steps in the order in which they are described._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . On the right are the same elements after propagation. The following steps comprise the drawing process and this section: System manager setup Drawing setup Place one-lines Propagation 108 . In general. Typically you begin drawing raceways with one-line elements (one-lines). The figure below displays one-line elements on the left.February 2003 The Drawing Process Before outlining a typical workflow for drawing a raceway. EE Raceway Modeling software allows you to place one-lines and then propagate them into three-lines or raceways.

for example). using the Set Raceway Defaults command (see the section entitled Setup Commands for information about this command). page 507 for information about adding specifications to the database). the system/application manager should determine the defaults and parameters that will affect your project and drawing (tray sizes._ _______________ System Manager Setup System Manager Setup 6. You can review the default and parameters settings while in the design file. 109 . Your system manager should also tell you the project name and design filename. For additional system manager information. and vendor names) and the desired systems and one-line types to the reference database (see Specification. specifications. The system manager must also add vendor catalogs (parts. Workflow Before you begin an individual drawing. see the appendix entitled System/Application Manager Information and the section entitled Installation Instructions.

you can change the default symbology settings for them. Then. page 264 for more information. ask the system manager to add them to reference database. page 258 for more information. Doing so involves two commands: Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control. You must have at least one raceway system defined and active in the design file. Set Symbology Once you have defined your systems and one-line types. page 262 for more information. If you need one-line types that are not available to you. use the Set Active System command to specify the system you want active as you are drawing raceways. Use the Set Symbology Control command to define the matrix of systems and one-line types for the design’s symbology control. The command displays all one-line types available in the reference database. page 295 for more information.February 2003 Drawing Setup Define Systems and Set Active Systems Every one-line type is part of a system that reflects the purpose of the raceway. The command displays all systems available in the reference database. Use the Symbology Control command to review and modify the symbology settings for those systems and one-line types you selected with the Set Symbology Control command. You can change the active one-line type throughout your drawing session._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 260 for more information. 110 . ask the system manager to add them to the reference database. If you need systems not available to you. Then. page 294 for more information. Use the Define One-Line Type command to define one-line types for the design file from the reference database. Use the Define System command to define your system(s) for the design file from the reference database. you must have at least one one-line type defined and active in order to draw raceways. See Set Active One-Line Type. You can also review and modify the default symbology settings with this command. See Set Symbology Control. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type Just as you must define systems from the reference database in the design file and set an active system. See Define One-Line Type. You can change the active system throughout the design session. See Set Active System. See Symbology Control. See Define System. use the Set Active One-Line Type command to specify the one-line type you want active as you are drawing raceways.

page 297 for more information. These parameters determine how the system defines fittings. To review and modify this data you will use the Set Active One-Line Parameters command. you are also placing the data associated with that one-line type in the reference database into the design file for loading later into the project database._ _______________ Set Active Parameters Drawing Setup 6. See Propagation Setup. and whether or not certain commands will automatically propagate one-lines. To review and modify these parameters you will use the Propagation Setup command. Set Propagation Parameters Before you propagate one-lines in your model. As you place one-line segments. what one-lines will be propagated. page 289 for more information. 111 . Workflow Each one-line type has its own set of parameters or catalogs. you should review the active propagation parameters. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters.

Place Manual Fitting. See Design Commands. page 132 . a phantom run disappears. page 129 for a description of the Place One-Line command. An accepted run has a Raceway Connect Point (RCP) attached to each end of the run. first place one-line segments (centerlines) in connected groups called runs. The following figure displays the parts of a run. When you accept the run. regardless of type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To draw a raceway. and the Precision Input form. you can continue placing one-lines. initially in phantom mode. page 119 for more information on these commands. 112 . it becomes a permanent part of the design file (unless you later choose to delete it). A run is a group of connected segments that do not branch or change specification. using the Place One-Line or Place Manual Fitting commands. page 147 . Once you place and accept a run. If not accepted. and Precision Input Form. Each run has a cross section on each end depicting the type of raceway and its orientation (for trays and wireways). See Place One-Line. until you accept them with the Accept option on the Precision Input form.February 2003 Place One-Line You will place all one-lines. placing tentative segments.

unusual angles. it allows you to define the shape of your fittings. Sketch is the quicker mode of propagation for two reasons. For example. Second._ _______________ Propagation A one-dimensional raceway is composed of one-line segments. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the specification information. When you propagate a one-line segment into a three-line element. 113 . EE Raceway provides rounded tray elbows. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the cross section and the radius. The system analyzes the environment in which the one-lines meet when determining the type of fitting to place. Eden propagation allows you greater detail and accuracy in three-dimensional fitting design. Workflow Sketch and Eden Modes There are two modes of propagation in EE Raceway: Sketch and Eden. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. Manual Fitting Placement You can place fittings manually in the design file using the Place Manual Fitting command. Sketch propagation places the sketched fittings based on the environment in which the onelines come together. Once found. propagation will automatically sketch a 90 degree elbow. and transition information stored for the one-lines and RCPs. pullboxes. page 194 for more information. extension. This radius is used to propagate fittings between straight segments. While this mode of propagation is considerably slower than sketch. and the width and height (or diameter) of a segment are determined by the active parameters when you placed the one-line. the specification dimensions and part information are sent to the Eden symbol library where the symbol is generated. Sketch: In sketch mode. To convert this onedimensional view of the raceway to a three-dimensional view. see Propagate Element. For example. where two tray sections come together at a 90 degree angle. see Place Manual Fitting. If you require mitred elbows for production. the three-line element’s shape is determined by the one-line type (tray. or fitting-to-fitting placement. All special fittings (conduit bodies. You can use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. It then searches the database for the appropriate part for the proper specification. The default fitting radius determines the radius of any bends between raceway segments. First. and light fixtures) must be placed manually. use the Propagate command. The length of each three-line segment is determined by the length of the one-line. you can define the fitting through Eden. For example. Propagation 6. for example). page 147 for more information. so reference database access is not required. This may be particularly useful for later interference detection. the three-dimensional elements are drawn in-line without accessing the Eden symbol library. all information necessary for sketching the three-line is stored in the design file. Eden: In Eden mode.

page 377 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Error Messages. the one-line elements remain in the design file. You have the option of hiding these circles by turning off level 63. definition. the propagation mode must be set to sketch. 114 . and specification. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. Any repropagation of such fittings will yield the same Eden symbols as well. In order for the circles to be placed on level 63. Seamless Tubing Representations In the following three-line representation of a bent conduit. This ensures that fittings will always be repropagated with the same orientation. To highlight errors that occur during propagation. page 314 . thus displaying a more realistic graphical representation of seamless tubing.February 2003 Fittings placed through the manual placement command are Eden symbols. see Highlight Propagation Errors. the corners that do not have an RCP display circles that make the bent conduit look like an elbow. For a detailed description of these error messages. regardless of the active propagation mode. You can turn off the one-line levels for display and plotting purposes. After propagation (whether performed in sketch or Eden mode).

The EE Raceway reference database provides a simple method for generating this repetitious annotation. Databases 6. can now be overridden by specifying another valid database key. The Raceway parameter information is supplied from the vendor catalog in the reference database. a database is a collection of information about raceway models. 115 . one-lines. Much of this annotation is repetitious and not unique to any element in the drawing. title blocks) in each drawing in a project. The Annotate Element command is used to place and modify the override key linkages. using the annotation forms. For the purposes of this discussion. Project Database The project database contains information about all the particular elements (RCPs. one-lines. You can both key in override values and display different annotation information. The reference database automatically supplies default annotation values for the project database. The form that displays with this command contains the reference database key value in a separate field below the annotation input area (see Annotate Element. The override key acts as a pointer to a row of data in the EE reference database. Override Keys EE Raceway supports EE reference database override keys. There are two databases that can be associated with your drawing: the reference database and the project database. the default can be unique for each title block cell. supplied by the reference database.) It will contain information about a particular drawing only after the Load Database process has been run on that drawing. and title blocks._ _______________ Databases A basic understanding of EE Raceway databases is necessary for efficient use of the software. The default annotation can be associated with RCPs. three-lines. (The project database can be created any time before the Load Database process is run. you can report on this information using the reports available through the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. three-lines. The project database is normally created when the project is created. Once the project database is loaded. (The system manager may customize these values. The default annotation information. For title blocks. page 178 ).) You can also add this information to this drawing using the Annotate Element command. Workflow Reference Database A large amount of annotation is used in raceway models. three-lines. and title blocks. one-lines. The override key gives you the ability to add to and/or modify default database information for RCPs.

) are stored. 116 .February 2003 With the addition of RIS to the EE Raceway product. A schema is a RIS-specific file that contains a description of the columns and tables of the database. three-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The database is the file where the non-graphic drawing data (onelines. a distinction is now made between schema and database. and also identifies which users will be allowed to use the database. etc.

See Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment._ _______________ Reports Reports 6. 117 . You can access these reports from the EE Raceway Drawing Menu by selecting the Report option. Workflow Currently. These reports run on the project and reference databases. For more detailed information about the individual reports. page 59 for general information about running reports. see Reports. there are several reports delivered with the EE Raceway Modeling software: four standard reports and a rule check report. page 545 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Create Interference Envelope (default name). You will use the Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process to create the envelope file needed for interference detection. This process reads the design file and then creates a data file that contains envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). 118 . page 342 for more information about the Interference Detection process. However.February 2003 Interference Detection Interference detection is processed through Plant Design software. the EE Raceway Modeling product creates an envelope file for input to the Plant Design interference detection task.

Precision Input Identify an absolute point Specify a delta coordinate to move. Specify a series of coordinate changes to move. When you select a command from the menu. a precision input form displays and remains in view as long as you are working in the command. Precision Input Form 7. page 415 for instructions about changing the form design. Specify an absolute coordinate to move._ _______________ 7. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. refer to the individual command sections for a description of operating sequences. This section describes each button and field available on the precision input form. Precision Input Form This chapter describes all the options available on the precision input form and how to use them. the form displays the active command name as its title. The precision input form is used to: Accept/reject/cancel in response to the active prompt. 119 . Since you will use the form with a number of commands. For each command. See System/Application Manager Information.

It also accepts any information you have entered through the form. In most cases. Reject Enters a negative response to an active prompt. Reject performs the same actions as pressing <R>. and prompts the system to continue to the next step. Cancel Terminates the active command. Accept performs the same actions as pressing <D>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Accept Enters an affirmative response to an active prompt. while collapsing the precision input form.February 2003 View This field displays the active working view. You can exit a command at any point by selecting Cancel. Pressing <D> in a view for the placement of points simultaneously overrides the active view setting. The displayed view determines the orientation of the elements you are placing in the design. It can also reset a current command action by one step. To change the displayed working view. Maximize/Minimize Enlarges the form to its maximum size or reduces the form to its normal size. 120 . select the field. The orientation of elements is most visible when placing annotation. and scroll through the available views until the appropriate view displays. In most cases.

and direction. 121 . you will select a directional button and key in a distance to place a point. Display Fields Displays some of your active parameters and general messages. by selecting North and keying in 20. The middle field displays the active one-line type specification description. Precision Input Form The Move (delta move) toggle allows you to specify the distance and direction to place an active point. For example. you will select a directional button and key in an absolute coordinate. Using Move. 7. The top field displays the active system and one-line type. while only Move To accepts a data point for input. by selecting North and keying in 20. The coordinates display in the following order: East/West North/South Elevation The following two options are only available when placing ductbanks. Precision Input The Move To (absolute move) toggle allows you to place an active point at an exact coordinate._ _______________ Move/Move To Toggle Used to specify a delta distance or absolute coordinates. you move to a point that is 20 master units north of the original active point. Both options accept key-in for distance. For example. you move to a point that is at coordinate 20 (in master units) in the north direction. Active Point Coordinates Display The Active Point Coordinates display shows the coordinates of the active segment point. Using Move To. The bottom field displays various precision input messages. A set of directional buttons accompanies each option.

By using the justification point and the height and width option described below. Three justification points are available: lower left.February 2003 Justification Point The justification point defines the location of the three-line duct bank graphic in relation to the one-line graphic. Height and Width These fields are used to define a ductbank element’s dimensions during placement._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can build duct bank elements similar to the one shown below. and lower right. lower center. 122 .

When you identify a one-line. Raceway one line Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line segment. Activate the Any Point option. Construct Point Midpoint/Any Point on Segment This command identifies a midpoint or any point on a segment at which to place an active point._ _______________ Construct Point This command specifies a series of movement options before accepting the shortest distance to the displayed location. and set the toggle to Any Point if it is not already active. The Any Point option allows you to identify either end of a segment and then specify a distance along that segment at which to place a point. only the coordinates of the last point you placed are accepted by the command. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Identify the one-line segment on which you intend to place a point. Select the Midpoint/Any Point command on the precision input form. and return to the previous step to identify another one-line. the option calculates and then enters its midpoint. The command highlights the identified segment. you can route segments nonorthogonally. If you do select Accept. Precision Input 123 . The command highlights one of the segment’s endpoints. but they are only tentative until you select the Accept button. You may place as many points as you want in this mode. When you select the command. Selecting the Reject button discontinues the command and returns you to the last point you placed before entering Construct Point mode. The operating sequence for the Any Point option is: 1. In Construct Point mode. a toggle displays with the following options: The Midpoint option finds the midpoint of a specified one-line. — OR — Press <R> to reject the segment. 7. 3. 2.

— OR — Press <R> to highlight the other segment endpoint. moving in the direction of the segment. and then press <D> to accept it as the reference point. 124 . 5. — OR — Select Accept to enter the active endpoint.February 2003 4. Accept/reject end point Press <D> to accept the highlighted endpoint as your reference point._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Specify Distance Key in the distance from the reference point to the point you want to enter. The command calculates the distance from the endpoint and then enters the point on the segment. If the specified distance exceeds the length of the one-line. and select Accept. — OR — Press <R> to return to Step 2. the command still calculates the point from the endpoint.

You must already have defined an active point to establish the active direction before using Extend/Reduce Run. you must key in a value by which to reduce the run. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to extend the run. When you select the Distance button. you must key in a value by which to extend the run. the following toggles display: The Extend Run toggle allows you to increase the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. You cannot use this command to place a first point. When you select the command. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the upcoming run by the displayed distance. When you select the Height or Width buttons. Using the toggle. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. the Full/Half toggle displays. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to reduce the run. When you select the Height or Width buttons. or any distance you key in. When you select the Distance button._ _______________ Extend/Reduce Run Extend/Reduce Run The Extend/Reduce Run command allows you to extend or reduce the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. Precision Input 125 . Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the run by the displayed distance. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the upcoming run by the displayed distance. Using the toggle. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. The Reduce Run toggle allows you to reduce the length of an upcoming segment by the value you specify. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. The command accepts as values the height and width of the active one-line type (as defined in its specification). The distance you key in displays in master units at the bottom of the form. the Full/Half toggle displays. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the run by the displayed distance. 7. The distance you key in displays at the bottom of the form.

You can define direction by keying in values for horizontal and vertical angles.The direction is defined by the active horizontal and vertical angles initially displayed. Steps 1. You can define distance with this command using the Move To and Move toggles or by specifying the true length from an active point._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Angles . Select the Distance and Direction command from the main precision input form.February 2003 Distance and Direction The Distance and Direction command specifies the distance and direction from an active point to place a point or vertex. Negative values are acceptable.These options define the change in the selected coordinate for the point in the direction entered. 2. Specify Distance/Direction You can define the distance in one of three ways: Distance . 3. 126 . Move . You can define the direction from the active point one of two ways: Active Direction . The Distance and Direction form displays.Define the true length from the active point in the direction to be defined. The coordinates of the active point and the angles of the active direction are displayed on the form. Select the direction and key in the absolute coordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate. Move to .These options define the absolute coordinate for the point in the direction to be defined.Key in the horizontal angle and the vertical angle in decimal degrees.

See Runtime Setup Commands. — OR — Select the Reset button or press <R> to reject the distance and direction option and return to the main Precision Input form. — OR — Select the Cancel button to terminate the active command. This option is set in the PDS product. Accept/Reject Distance and Direction Select the Process button to accept the displayed distance and direction and return to the main Precision Input form._ _______________ Distance and Direction The direction is always determined by both the horizontal and the vertical angles. the horizontal angle starts at the North coordinate (zero degrees). The vertical angle is measured up or down from the horizontal plane of the active point. The default setting is clockwise. If clockwise. 4. modify. Precision Input Runtime Setup The Runtime Setup command is used to define. If counterclockwise. 7. 127 . and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. page 287 for more information on the available commands. the horizontal angle starts at the east coordinate (zero degrees). The horizontal angle can be measured clockwise or counterclockwise.

February 2003 128 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and right cylinder. and size conduit and duct banks. Design 129 . Set Active Parameters — Sets the active parameters in the design file based on an identified one-line or RCP. change the active design parameters. circle. You can also use these commands to enter an active point. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. and equipment pointer symbols – in the design file. Place Manual Fitting — Places a manual fitting in the design file at the specified orientation and location. Route Around Vessel — Routes elements parallel to an arc. 8. The commands on this palette place raceway elements – one-lines. Define Active Point — Places an active point in the design file. Rotate Cross Section — Rotates a cross section at the current cross section angle. raceway connect points (RCPs). Place Drop Point — Places a drop point symbol in the design file._ _______________ 8. Insert RCP — Places a raceway connect point (RCP) in your raceway model. Commands Place One-Line — Places the centerlines of raceway elements. Design Commands Design Commands The Design palette is activated by selecting Design from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. manual fittings. Place Equipment Pointer — Places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. There are also commands available for routing one-lines around vessels and for inserting vertices in an existing one-line. rotate cross sections. drop points.

Define Duct Cross Section — Defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit for an underground conduit duct bank. Insert One-Line Vertex — Places a vertex in an existing one-line. Place Stub Up — Places conduit stub ups from an underground ductbank. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer.February 2003 Conduit Sizing — Sizes conduit by "placing" cables in the conduit to determine the percent fill. Place Field Routed Raceway — Places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 130 .

Design You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Design commands. 131 . For detailed information about precision input. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. you must have ductbank one-lines placed before you can use the Define Duct Cross Section command. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements._ _______________ Using the Design Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. See Setup Commands. page 119 . see Precision Input Form. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. Using the Design Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. You must have conduit one-lines placed in the design file before you can use the Conduit Sizing command. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Likewise. 8.

Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. and annotation of the original one-line. or specifications of a one-line. If the priority levels are equal between one-line types. you can resume routing an existing one-line. Continue One-Line — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. conduit. This allows you to use the existing RCP as a beginning and/or termination point. raceway parameters. while the active system determines the system to which the one-line belongs. Whenever you begin or terminate a one-line segment. The values are defined by the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. Any one-line segment you are placing in space._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then connect will not be an option. you will have at least one of five possible routing options. you can connect to an existing one-line. is new. Attach to RCP — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. The active one-line type determines the type of one-line you place (tray. You can also combine two existing one-line segments using Continue. The following list describes each routing option in detail: New RCP — If you do not identify a one-line or RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. Drop points establish connectivity between one-lines and RCPs where they are of different one-line types. RCPs are required when you are changing the system. and so forth). or when you place a fitting. unattached to another element. One-line routes begin and terminate with a raceway connect point (RCP). Break One-Line — If you identify a one-line for the beginning and/or termination point. These two segments will retain the systems. Connect will place a drop point cell on the identified one-line at the point of identification. 132 .February 2003 Place One-Line This command places the centerlines of raceway elements based on points you give it. the system places a new RCP and routes the one-line from/to the RCP. one-line type. based on every possible combination of routing options. you can attach to an existing RCP. one-line type. Connect to One-Line — If you identify either a one-line or an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. Active raceway parameters supply the default data associated with each one-line segment as you sketch. One-line types with lower priority can only connect to one-line types with higher priority. The chart below illustrates the parameters that are assigned to one-lines as you place or modify them. the system places a new RCP and breaks the existing one-line into two one-line segments.

though it is not a recommended practice. the command will not allow the continue option. You should keep the following points in mind when using the Place One-Line command: If an RCP on the end of a one-line belongs to a manual fitting. attach. or continue. Design 133 . then the identified one-line or RCP must have at least one system in common with the active systems._ _______________ Place One-Line In the above chart: Active — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the active raceway parameters. First — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the first one-line you identified. Last — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the last one-line you identified. then the identified one-line must be of the same one-line type as the active one-line type. If you reject all routing options for the beginning and/or termination points of a oneline. 8. then the command places a new RCP by default. If the beginning and termination actions are continue. then the two identified one-lines must have all systems in common. or continue. If the beginning or termination action is break. You can attach to or continue manually placed straights. attach. If the beginning or termination action is break. This allows RCPs to be placed on top of one another without establishing connectivity.

— OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. page 119. 3. Steps 1. accept input. see Precision Input Form. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the cross section rotation. Select the Place One-Line command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4. 134 . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Refer to the description of routing options at the beginning of this section to determine proper routing. Using the form. and exit a command. You must set an active one-line type and system in the design file. The system places cross sections and RCPs (if they do not already exist) on the ends of the one-line. Data Point Accepts. reset a command action. 2. page 287 . Begin entering points to sketch the one-lines. you can locate elements. and return to step 2. Complete the routing. The Place One-Line precision input form displays. you should be familiar with the Set Raceway Defaults command (see Set Raceway Defaults. At any point during this operating sequence. page 256 ). prompting you to Enter first data point. See Set Active One-Line Type and Set Active System in Runtime Setup Commands. reject input. The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. In addition. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command.

To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. such as an elbow._ _______________ Route Around Vessel Route Around Vessel This command routes the active one-line type around a vessel (represented by an arc. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 119. or right cylinder) selected in either the active or reference design file. If the RCP has a fitting on it. The route is attached to two terminating RCPs which may or may not have a fitting on them. circle. Design Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 135 . see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. the fitting angle will be used when routing off the RCP and around the vessel. 8. or right cylinder element can be a single MicroStation element. circle. A fitting on the RCP can only have two attach points. Wye and tee fittings cannot be used. The arc. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. Using the form. the route will come off the RCP at a 90 degree angle to the one-line. route one-lines. and exit a command. If the RCP does not have a fitting. you can locate elements. reject input. or part of a cell.

5. be sure that the distance from the RCPs to the vessel is the same as the minimum distance you key in. 136 .February 2003 Steps 1. The route is not placed at the minimum distance from the vessel all the way around. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the vessel to route around. Key in minimum distance from vessel Key in the minimum distance. If you want the route to maintain the minimum distance all the way around the vessel. the route can be placed to the vessel. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the second RCP. 4. Identify second RCP Select the RCP on the other side of the vessel where you want the route to end and press <D> to accept it. the closest. You cannot key in a negative value. Identify first RCP Select the RCP where you want the route to begin and press <D> to accept it. The precision input form displays. Identify vessel to route around Select the vessel (the arc. which you want to route around and press <D> to accept it. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the first RCP._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. circle. or right cylinder element) between the RCPs. 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The minimum distance key-in defines the closest the route can come to the vessel. Select the Route Around Vessel command.

_ _______________ 6. — OR — Press <R> to place the elements on the other side of the vessel. Key in the number of one-line segments Key in the number of one-line segments to use when routing around the vessel. 7. Design 137 . Accept/reject Press <D> to accept that the elements should be placed on that side of the vessel. The route is calculated and the elements display on one side of the vessel. The number of segments must be greater than one (two segments or more). Route Around Vessel 8. — OR — Press <R> twice to back up one step and key in a new number of one-line segments. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and key in a new minimum distance from vessel value.

Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line element. reject input. you can locate elements. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The Insert RCP precision input form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 138 . the system displays the message Element not found. and exit a command. 2. route one-lines.February 2003 Insert RCP This command breaks an identified one-line in the design file and inserts a raceway connect point (RCP)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. Select the Insert RCP command from the menu. Steps 1. The system highlights a valid one-line. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

Go to Step 2. If you accept the one-line. — OR — If you reject the one-line. Continue inserting RCPs. — OR — Exit the command. Go to Step 2. the system prompts you to identify another. 4. Design 139 ._ _______________ 3. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept or reject the highlighted one-line. the command inserts the RCP as specified. Insert RCP 8.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 140 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The Rotate Cross Section precision input form displays. this command does not rotate duct bank’s cross section. route one-lines. go to step 4. Identify Cross Section Identify a cross section and accept it with a <D>. but changes the duct bank justification location. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. Steps 1. If you identified a duct bank cross section. Using the form. see Set Raceway Defaults. page 256 for more information. Otherwise continue to step 3.February 2003 Rotate Cross Section This command rotates a cross section using the current cross section rotation angle. reject input. 2. You can change the rotation angle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. and exit a command. For detailed information about precision input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Rotate Cross Section command. For duct bank cross sections. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. page 119. accept input.

Repeat this step. page 256 for information about changing the angle of rotation._ _______________ — OR — Exit the command. The message disappears when you identify a valid cross section. See Set Raceway Defaults. 4. The duct bank justification changes and the command exits. Data Point Accepts. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Rotate Cross Section The system highlights a valid cross section. 8. the system displays the message Element not found. Select New Cross Section Justification Select a new justification point from the precision input form and accept it. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the current cross section orientation and exit the command. The system rotates the cross section by the defined rotation angle. If Automatic Propagation is on. Design 141 . the elements will repropagate at the new orientation angle. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section. 3.

At any point during this operating sequence. the system displays the message Element not found. The values which determine priority status are defined in the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file. the drop-out point will be calculated by determining the closest point on the one-line to the drop point symbol. route one-lines. and exit a command. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Using the form. reject input. If the drop point symbol is not on the one-line. You can place drop points between RCPs and one-lines of the same and/or different one-line type. The point on the one-line where you place the drop point symbol defines the drop-out point. page 119. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Select the Place Drop Point command. 142 . You can also establish connectivity between two one-lines where graphic coincidence does not occur. establish connectivity between a piece of conduit and a tray at the point where the cables drop out of the tray into the conduit. 2. Steps 1.February 2003 Place Drop Point This command places a drop point symbol in the design file. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. a higher number indicates a lesser priority. for instance. you can locate elements. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. For example. You can. The Place Drop Point precision input form displays. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. accept input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. 10 is of lesser priority than 5. Drop points establish connectivity between a RCP and a one-line. The system highlights a valid RCP. reset a command action.

Go to step 4. — OR — Reject the one-line. The system prompts you to identify another RCP. Go to step 2. 5. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. and returns you to the previous prompt. Place Drop Point 8. The system places the drop point as specified. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Accept the highlighted RCP. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the one-line. — OR — Reject the highlighted RCP. — OR — Press <R> or Reject to identify a different RCP. The system prompts you to identify another one-line. The system highlights the identified one-line. Design 143 . 4. Go to step 2._ _______________ 3. The identification point is the point at which the system will place the drop point.

If you do not locate an acceptable element. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. Enter data point to place Place a data point at the desired location for the equipment pointer symbol. 3. The system places the equipment pointer symbol as specified. The system highlights a valid RCP. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 2. At any point during this operating sequence. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The equipment pointer should match the corresponding symbol in the PDS Equipment Modeling product. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Select the Place Equipment Pointer command. Using the form. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file and accept it. Continue placing equipment pointer symbols in the design. accept input. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Steps 1. route one-lines. 144 . For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. — OR — Press <R> to select another RCP. and exit a command. reset a command action. page 119. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Place Equipment Pointer This command places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. An equipment pointer symbol serves as a tag that identifies a particular piece of equipment. you can locate elements. the system displays the message Element not found. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Define Active Point Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Select the Define Active Point command. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ Define Active Point This command defines a new active point in your design file. For detailed information about precision input. Steps 8. The Enter Active Point precision input form displays. 145 . reject input. and exit a command. and exits the command. reset a command action. The command makes the specified data point the active point. page 119. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. 2. Design 1. Enter active point Specify a data point in the design file where you want the active point to be. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input.

146 . The system sets the active one-line type. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element as the one to use. Using the form. accept input. 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The command exits automatically. one-line type. Steps 1. active systems. to those of a one-line or RCP you identify. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Set Active Parameters precision input form displays. Return to step 2. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reset a command action. The system highlights the identified element. and raceway parameters. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. page 119. you can locate elements. route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Select a one-line or RCP to use to set the active parameters. reject input. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element.February 2003 Set Active Parameters This command sets the active parameters. and one-line type parameters based on the highlighted element. system. Select the Set Active Parameters command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.

and light fixtures) as well as spec driven fittings (horizontal elbows. During placement. or fitting-to-fitting placement. If the active point lies in the vicinity of a fitting. the system derives the default orientation for placing the new fitting from the placement point. the location of a manual fitting is determined by the location of the active point. vertical tees. You can place special fittings (conduit bodies. You will use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible._ _______________ Place Manual Fitting This command identifies a unique part from the reference database and places it in the design file at whatever orientation and location you specify. unusual angles. If the new fitting and the existing one do not share the same system and one-line type. When placing a straight section. pullboxes. the system locates the closest attachment point on that fitting. Place Manual Fitting 8. Such a fitting is placed with its own RCP. or placing a fitting on the end of a straight section. Otherwise. When attaching a manual fitting to the placement point of another fitting (or a straight). you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. the new fitting is attached to the existing fitting and a one-line is automatically placed. Design 147 . For example. the system extends the one-line for that straight to terminate on the RCP of the fitting. then the system places the new fitting by itself. and so forth) using this command.

Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. one-line type. To change the displayed three-line type. Modifying the value for Type also may change the active and available subtypes. To change the displayed subtype. the command derives the orientation from the place point. See Define Active Point. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. select a value from the list. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. horizontal. To change the displayed qualifier. Otherwise.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. See Set Active System. See Set Active One-Line Type. 148 . inside vertical. straight._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and active one-line type parameters in the design.) for that specification. page 145 . page 295 . select a value from the list. Changing the active parameters updates the part information elsewhere on the form. page 146 . the previous orientation will be retained. etc. If manual placement cannot locate a fitting. etc. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. rigid. Selecting a new active one-line type updates the part information elsewhere on the form.February 2003 Commands Define Active Point — Defines the active point in the design file for the placement of fittings.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. page 294 . wye. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to select a new active system. etc. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. See Set Active Parameters. select a value from the list. Set Active Parameters — Defines the active system.

(-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. Qualifier. When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). 8. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. To display the specification itself. and key in the new value. (if applicable) Spec2. Subtype. the Length field does not display on the form. To change the displayed part. and Qualifier. — OR — Change any of the values for Type. Design 149 . If straight is not your active Type._ _______________ Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. Doing so displays a specification form. and key in the new value. key in a negative angle. The list contains all available specifications. Subtype. select the corresponding Display button. To change the displayed specification. select an angle from the list or select the field. Part — Displays the active part. Subtype. and Qualifier for the current specification. You can only review the values in this field. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. Place Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. The list contains available angles. Spec1. select the field. or Angle (if applicable). select a value from the list. To change the displayed length. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. select a value from the list. To change the displayed angle.

Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. if any. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. the existing RCP location is fixed. containing all matching rows. Type.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. You can review and modify the values in this column.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. If an * displays in the List column. If Cutback Mode is off. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Subtype. then a second form. For a list of valid operators.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If Cutback Mode is on. Clear . page 178 . for the given Spec1. then the column value has an associated codelist. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. see Annotate Element. Column value . To display the codelist. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. and key in a new value. Doing so displays a specification form. You can only review the information in this column. Cutback Mode — Defines whether a straight section is to be cutback when placing a manual fitting. 150 . then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. which automatically activates it. Select . select the slide bar. and Qualifier. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. select the Override button.February 2003 Column name . Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. If more than one row matches the criteria.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). select the *. List . Then select the field. the RCP will be moved accordingly. To change a value. Override . displays. If only one row matches this criteria. To change the active placepoint. See Spec1 for a description of the form.

then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. — OR — Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields._ _______________ Automatic Size — Automatically selects the correct size fitting.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. select the field. Rotate Orientation — Defines the active orientation matrix.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. the Place Manual Fitting form displays. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. and key in a new value. Design 151 . About . Angle . To change the displayed angle. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. To change the displayed axis. select the field. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. You must specify the manual fitting type before using the button. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. Secondary. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. then the largest fitting available is used. Place Manual Fitting The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. 8. then that fitting is used. Automatic Fit — Re-orients the fitting in reference to the one-line it is associated with. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays.

In other words. When set to All. For example. if you set type to form 7c. you set the active Table to cond_body. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. 152 . then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. type. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. if you set material to feraloy. will be displayed in the size list. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. see the descriptions earlier in this section. select a table name from the list. vendor to 3. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. material to feraloy. and vendor to 3. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes.February 2003 Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. size. Similarly. Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. made of feraloy from vendor 3. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table that matches the attribute values. regardless of the other attribute settings. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. and vendor display as the active attributes. material. and size to 1/2 inch. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. To change the active special part table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Such fittings are called special parts. orientation. and location. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. For more information. On the other hand. 4. 153 . To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. 3. orientations. and location until the desired fitting is seen in dynamics (phantom mode) in the design file. Go to step 4. Change fitting descriptions. radius. see Precision Input Form. set the toggle to Driven By Table. Place Manual Fitting When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. height. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts: Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 8. The system accepts the fitting at the specified location and orientation.) to construct the three-line symbols. Select the Place Manual Fitting command. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. page 119 . Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements._ _______________ Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. 2. etc. Select Accept to accept the fitting with the current settings. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. you should first consider a few points. The Place Manual Fitting form displays. Design Steps 1.

Continue placing manual fittings.February 2003 5. — OR — Exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 154 .

_ _______________ Conduit Sizing This command places cables (wires) in a conduit to determine the correct conduit size based on the conduit’s percent fill calculation. Conduit Sizing 8. Design 155 .

This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value.February 2003 Field Descriptions Column Alias — Displays the column aliases for each column in the database table. If you do not enter another operator. This operator is a wild card. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. representing a single character. This operator is a wild card. select the *. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Code List — Indicates whether a Value has an associated code list. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. representing zero or more characters. A code list is a list of valid database values for that Column Alias._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Value — Select and key in values to use as search criteria to find corresponding cables in the database. 156 . You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. This command also accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. then the Value has an associated code list. To display the code list. If an * displays in the column. the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value.

Process Query — Queries the database to find cables matching the search criteria defined in the Value fields._ _______________ Initialize Query — Clears all entries in the Value fields. from which you can select a cable or cables to route in the conduit. 8. the PseudoCable form displays. There are two methods to choose from: — Increase Size ONLY . Percent Fill — Displays how full the conduit is as a percentage. the next size larger conduit in the spec table is used until an adequately sized conduit is found.When a conduit is calculated to be full. Any cables in the active conduit before the copy are removed. Using this form you can select another conduit in which to route cables without having to exit the command. The Percent Fill calculation is based on the conduit’s cross-sectional area divided by the summation of all of that conduit’s cables’ cross-sectional areas. Add Cable — Mode for adding cables to a conduit. it is added to the conduit. Copy Contents — Copies cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit. Append Contents — Adds cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit leaving any cables in the active conduit there. If more than one cable matches the search criteria. Select Conduit — Displays the Conduit Sizing precision input form. The field displays in red and the message Warning: Percent Fill exceeds maximum allowed displays when the conduit has reached its capacity as defined by the electrical code you are using. Design 157 .The smallest conduit available in the spec that meets the percent fill criteria is used. Conduit Size — Displays the size of the conduit in spec units. Field Descriptions Increase Size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size — Defines how the conduit should be sized. Selected Cables — Displays information on all cables that have been selected to go in the active conduit. — Increase/Decrease size . If only one cable is found that matches the criteria.

See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. This field can be edited to take positive integers other than zero (zero and blank are invalid entries).February 2003 Remove Cable — Mode for removing cables from a conduit._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. Quantity — Defines the number of cables of that type. 3. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. accept input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Delete All Cables — Deletes all cables in the active conduit. This option is available only when Remove Cable is selected. reset a command action. 158 . reject input. and exit a command. Select the Conduit Sizing command. You must use the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command to define how the conduit sizes will be selected. see Precision Input Form. Set the Increase size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size toggle to the sizing method you want. Define the cables for the conduit. At any point during this operating sequence. The Conduit Sizing precision input form displays. page 119. 4. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. Identify CONDUIT Identify the conduit to size and accept it with <D> The Conduit Sizing form displays. 2. You can query the database and select them from the form or copy them from a conduit that has "cable" in it. page 268 for more information.

Field Descriptions 8._ _______________ 5. If the largest size conduit available does not satisfy the percent fill calculation. Select Accept to calculate and size the conduit. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command and ignore any changes you have made. Design 159 . a warning message displays.

Steps 1. and exit a command. The selected one-line highlights. The vertex is inserted. 2. 3. The point that identifies the one-line in this step is the point where the vertex is inserted. At any point during this operating sequence. reject input.February 2003 Insert One-Line Vertex This command places a vertex in an existing one-line. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Move One-Line Vertex. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. If Automatic Propagation is on. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. — OR — Press <R> to reject the one-line. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 160 . see Precision Input Form. route one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the one-line will repropagate and the vertex will display with its cross-section. page 192 for more information. The Insert One-line Vertex precision input form displays. accept input. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line. Using the form. Identify Raceway One-line Select the one-line to which to add the vertex. you can locate elements. reset a command action. To move an inserted vertex. Select the Insert One-Line Vertex command. use the Move One-Line Vertex command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

you must key in the length in the Distance to equipment field. This command is intended primarily to support field routed conduit and airways. When on. Similarly. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. Column value — Defines a value for the corresponding equipment identifying attribute in the Column name field. 161 . there are instances where the raceway does not terminate at equipment and cables must be routed through airways (space) by the installer from the raceway to the equipment. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. You are prompted to position the annotation after the equipment pointer is placed in the design. select the field and key in a new length. This field is informational only. The column names reside in the ee_unique table in the reference schema. Design Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for the columns (attributes) in the reference schema that unique identify equipment. Field routed raceway sections are needed to get appropriate material takeoff (MTO) reports and to facilitate cable routing. For example. Display — Enables or disables the annotation of the Column value. conduit less than a particular size is typically not modeled in the plant model but is installed in the field by the installer. To change the displayed length. select the field and key in the new value. This length represents the estimated length of raceway to the equipment from the beginning point of the placed one-line. the value is displayed in the design. To change the value. but can also be used for other raceway types that are field routed._ _______________ Place Field Routed Raceway The Place Field Routed Raceway command places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. Keyin/Calculate — Defines the method for entering the distance from the beginning of the placed one-line to the equipment (that is. field route length.) When set to Keyin. The Distance to equipment specifies the field routed length (in subunits) of the placed one-line.

) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. To change the displayed angle. The software calculates the orthogonal distance (that is. you are prompted to identify the location of the equipment. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Secondary. z deltas) from the beginning of the placed one-line to the identified equipment location. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. and exit a command. About — Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. When placing the one-line element using the First Point & Orientation method the Rotate Orientation gadgets display. route one-lines. After specifying the orientation and the length of the one-line. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. Length of Placed Raceway Field — Displays the length by which to project the oneline along the orientation tee from the first point. First Point & Orientation/Beginning & Ending Point — Defines the method for entering the plant coordinates of the one-line element. and key in a new value. At any point during this operating sequence. Or you can identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. When placing the one-line element using the Beginning & Ending Point method. you are prompted for the beginning and ending plant coordinates of the one-line. accept input. page 119. select the field. The calculated distance is stored with the one-line as field routed length. To change the displayed axis. Angle — Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. For detailed information about precision input. placement point) of the one-line element. 162 . you are prompted for the first point (that is. select the field. sum of the x. you can locate elements. and key in a new value. reject input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reset a command action. and toggle between the three axis (Primary. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. select the field. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 When the Keyin/Calculate toggle is set to Calculate. To change the displayed length. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. y.

Design 163 . 3. The precision input form displays. The Place Field Routed Raceway form displays. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line element to which you want to connect the field routed raceway section and accept it when it highlights. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications._ _______________ Operator Sequence 1. Select the Place Field Routed Raceway command. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. — OR — Exit the command. 2.

Unassigned or unused buttons in the matrix are not used in calculating the ductbank’s cross sectional size unless they are in the middle of assigned buttons. By assigning a conduit. Copy section layout from — Copies an existing duct cross section layout from a specified duct into the active duct. you assign that area in the duct bank. Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that extends the size of the duct bank. cable or gap to a button._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 164 . The duct bank will automatically resize after configuration to accommodate the defined conduit or cable.February 2003 Define Duct Cross Section This command defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit or cable for underground duct banks. All assigned buttons (areas) are then used to calculate the duct bank’s cross section.

Control Number — Displays the control number to use for retrieving the conduit/cable information from the project database. Gap Distance — Defines a gap between two conduit/cables in the matrix. The cable schedule is not the same table as the cable table in the EE Wiring Diagram and Panel Design software. See Set Raceway Defaults. The gap distance will appear on the button after assignment. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cndsch_spec table. If cable routing is selected._ _______________ Add — Assigns a conduit. You can define any control number that is loaded to the project database. A form displays all available conduit/cables in the project database for the defined control number. Modify — Removes an existing button assignment and replaces it with new assignment. Define Duct Cross Section Delete — Removes a conduit/cable or gap from a matrix button. Horizontal spacing — Defines the horizontal spacing between each button (area). You define whether you are routing conduit or cables by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. The conduit/cable identification will appear on the button after assignment. The gap is measured from the center of the left conduit/cable to the center of the right conduit/cable and can only be defined on the top row of buttons. Move — Moves a conduit/cable or gap from one matrix button to another. These tables are the cable/conduit schedule listings used for this project. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cabsch_spec table. page 256 for more information. cable or gap to a matrix button. Design 165 . 8. If conduit routing is selected. Vertical spacing — Defines the vertical spacing between each button (area).

— OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes. If you select Confirm (√) on the warning form. 2. The duct bank section layout. a space between the button matrix and the outside of the ductbank in the EE Raceway Defaults form. a warning form displays confirming that you want to exit without saving changes. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. is assigned to the duct one-line. page 119. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. all conduit/cable information. the duct bank will automatically repropagate. you can locate elements. Select the Define Duct Cross Section command. and exit a command. The duct bank size is checked and resized as necessary. If you select Cancel after having modified the ductbank’s layout. For detailed information about precision input. The Duct Cross Section Layout form displays. Identify duct element Select the duct bank element for which to define the cross section layout and accept it with <D>. The precision input form displays. 166 . page 256 for more information. both width and height. Select Confirm (√) to exit the form and save your changes. route one-lines. accept input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. If you select Cancel on the warning form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reject input. See Set Raceway Defaults. any changes you made will be ignored. Define cross section layout using the various commands. Define whether you are placing conduit or cables in the duct bank by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. 3. you can define a margin width. 4. Likewise. you cancel your "exit without saving" and are returned to the command. If Automatic Propagation is on.

You must define the conduit sizing attributes using the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command._ _______________ Place Stub Up Place Stub Up This command manipulates conduit stub ups. Stub ups are pieces of conduit associated with a conduit or cable contained in an underground duct bank and are placed in the raceway model for making above ground conduit connections. vendor. page 260 . The conduit specification and the conduit sizing attributes (for example. page 289 . page 164 . You must define the duct cross section layout using the Define Duct Cross Section command. You must select the a conduit specification using the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. See Define Duct Cross Section. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. page 268 . 167 . See Set Active One-Line Type. 8. You must define conduit as the active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. material) are used to determine the conduit stub up sizes available. The stub up is connected to the corresponding underground duct bank section by means of a drop point. See Define One-Line Type. page 294 . Design Before Using this Command You must define conduit as an available one-line type using the Define One-Line Type command. units. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes.

Stub Up Size — After selecting the Place Stub Up button and selecting a conduit/cable from the active duct segment. Select Duct Segment — Selects an existing duct segment in the raceway model as the active duct segment. If underground conduit routing is selected for this model. Change Association — Changes the association of a conduit stub up from the currently associated conduit/cable to another conduit/cable in the active duct segment. conduit/cable) to manipulate. you are required to select the desired size from the available sizes. Stub Up Length — Displays the conduit stub up length as measured in the model master units (feet. this field displays the associated conduit stub up size.February 2003 Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that has or has not been assigned during the Define Duct Cross Section command. This matrix is used in the Change Association and Place Stub Up options to identify which cross section (that is. Delete Stub Up — Deletes a conduit stub up. meters) The user can optionally override the displayed value. the size of stub up will be retrieved from the conduit schedule table in project schema based upon conduit number that user selected from matrix._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can optionly override the displyed value by selecting a conduit stub up size from the available sizes as determined by matching the conduit sizing attributes to the active conduit specification. 168 . Place Stub Up — Places a conduit stub up in the raceway model associated with a conduit/cable in the active duct segment. If underground cable routing is selected for this model or the conduit size is not defined for the conduit number. The displayed value is simply the value from the previous place stub up selection.

Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The precision input form displays. The identified duct one-line’s cross section layout displays in the Button Matrix. Select Option Select the Select Duct Segment option. 2. 3. Go to Step 4. Steps 8. Go to Step 9. Design — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. — OR — Select the Place Stub Up option. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select the Delete Stub Up option. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. — OR — Exit the option. 169 . The Place Stub Up form displays. Go to Step 14. The identified element highlights. 4. Select the Place Stub Up command. Identify duct element Identify a duct one-line in the design file. 5. — OR — Select the Change Association option._ _______________ Steps 1. Select the Select Duct Segment option. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 2.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to Step 7. It also deletes all cross sections. Select the Delete Stub Up option. — OR — Exit the option. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. annotation. Conduit/Cable Number = [conduit/cable number] Select another cable/conduit to modify existing stub up. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 170 . — OR — Exit the option. 12. 9. Select stub up for modification. 7. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. The identified element highlights. Go to Step 2. The precision input form displays. Go to Step 2. propagated elements. Select the Change Association option. and RCP’s that are associated with the selected one-line. Go to Step 7. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element.February 2003 6. 10. 8. The precision input form displays. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. is displays in the form message field. Go to Step 10. 11. The identified element highlights.

16. 171 . Select the Place Stub Up option. Go to Step 2. Select location to place stub up. 15. Stub up spec. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. Select a button from the Button Matrix. Select location to place stub up. 17._ _______________ Select a button from the Button Matrix. 13. Select a button from the Button Matrix. The precision input form displays. — OR — Select a option button. — OR — Exit the placement of the selected conduit/cable. Design Go to Step 14. displays in the message field. has been changed. Go to Step 2. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. — OR — Override the stub up size or length. Place a data point at the desired location for the top of the conduit stub up. 14. displays in the message field. Steps 8. The stub up is placed down from the given data point. Go to Step 2. The system places the stub up and connects it to the duct bank by means of a drop point located on the duct bank one-line closest to the bottom of the conduit stub up. Go to Step 17.

February 2003 172 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Modify Commands The Modify commands manipulate elements. then selecting Palette. such as RCPs. deleting. and three-lines. Modify Commands Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. three-lines. 9. You can elect to manipulate either single elements or those elements belonging to an active group._ _______________ 9. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. and propagation. annotation. These palettes and their commands will be described in this chapter. 173 . Available element manipulations include copying. one-lines. annotating. Modify Element Commands — Manipulate single elements within the design file. within the design file. Modify Modify Group Commands — Define elements for inclusion in a group and manipulate elements belonging to the active group. and so forth). moving. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. The Modify palette is activated by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Commands The commands on the Modify palette both activate other command palettes.

see Precision Input Form. For reliable results. you should use these commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands.February 2003 Using the Modify Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see the Design Commands. 174 . you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). page 119 . You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. See Setup Commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and one-line types. For detailed information about precision input. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for the commands in this group. any time you are modifying raceway elements. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Modify Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. Commands Annotate Element — Places. copy._ _______________ Modify Element Commands The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate onelines in your raceway model. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (oneline. to review or edit element annotation. then selecting Palette. Modify Element Commands The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. and three-lines. within the design file. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. three-lines. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. then selecting Modify Element Commands. You can use individual commands to move. including RCPs. 175 . one-lines. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. annotation. 9. reviews. and delete specified elements. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. and so forth).

Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. 176 . Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. and elements associated with it. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. from the design file. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element.

page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. For reliable results. and so forth). Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. For detailed information about precision input. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements._ _______________ Using the Modify Element Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. see Precision Input Form. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. 177 . Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. 9. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. three-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Element commands. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. See Setup Commands. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). any time you are modifying raceway elements. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Using the Modify Element Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. page 119 . You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. you should use these commands. annotation.

reviews. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. three-lines. By definition. 178 . The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. straights. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes.February 2003 Annotate Element This command places. and fittings. you are allowed only to review the annotation. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for an RCP. and edits intelligent annotation for individual raceway elements. Using this command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For straights and fittings. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for a one-line. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database.

If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. select the *. Where UD displays in the column. The key field is updated. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. however. enter nothing into the design. If an * displays in the List column. using your keyboard space bar. Where the toggle is On. You can only review the Column name column information. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. Modify 179 . Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. If Ref displays in the column. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. If blanks exist for a field. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. select the field. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. The next time you enter the annotation form. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. the value will display in the design where you place it. select the Column value field and delete the blank character. To delete an override on a reference database attribute._ _______________ Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. the field remains null. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. the corresponding column value comes from user data. If you can only view (read) the column value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. the Access column displays a R/W. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. When modified. then the value derives from the design file. To display the codelist. Field Descriptions Source — Displays the source of the corresponding column value. the value is saved back to user data. If you change a column value. then it will display an R. and key in the new value. then the value derives from the reference database. 9. it becomes an override key to the reference database. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the graphic display for each column value. You can only review the information in this column. Otherwise. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Empty <Return>s. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. Once you have deleted the override. where New had displayed. If Dgn displays in the column. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. You can review and modify the values in this field. You can enter blank spaces into the design. To change the values associated with the element.

but cannot delete it. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. the key specified in the user element is used. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. the field remains null. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. Once you place an override key on an element. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. select the field.February 2003 If you delete the value in this field. which automatically activates it. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If more than one row matches the criteria. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. From this form you can select the row(s) containing the desired values. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. the Default key is used. To change the displayed value. select the row you want. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). you can modify it. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. Available operators are described later in this section. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. Otherwise. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. and key in a new value. and then select Confirm (√). If no key exists in the user element. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. 180 . Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. If you select Cancel (X). a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. You can only review the information in this field.

This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. see Precision Input Form. 181 . At any point during this operating sequence. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator is a wild card._ _______________ This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator is a wild card. Using the form. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. If you do not enter another operator. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. reject input. route one-lines. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. the system assumes =. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. representing zero or more characters. accept input. you can locate elements. reset a command action. Field Descriptions > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR 9. representing a single character. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. page 119. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.

Select the Annotate Element command. and place a data point. The new value displays in the design file. 182 . Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. 3. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. — OR — Exit the command. Identify Raceway element Identify the element to annotate (one-line. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The message disappears when you identify a valid element. return to Step 2. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. The system highlights the specified element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The prompt indicates the column alias being placed. Position the column value. 6. drop point. When there are no more values to place. reset <R> to skip. It also identifies all the possible values (column values) associated with this element. Return to step 2. three-line. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. This step repeats for each new value. Return to Step 2. The annotation form displays when you accept the element. or RCP). the system displays the message Element not found. 2. equipment pointer.February 2003 Steps 1. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. 4. 5. The form displays all the current values associated with the element. The Annotate Element precision input form displays.

Field Descriptions 9. When you annotate any raceway element. repropagate all of the connected raceway elements._ _______________ Any value placed with the Annotate Element command will be entered into the drawing and. if you see graphics extending into the next raceway element. optionally. these values are loaded into the project database. Modify 183 . displayed. When you load the project database.

This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 184 . page 119. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Copy Element This command copies raceway elements to specified locations within the design file. route one-lines. and exit a command. For detailed information about precision input. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. accept input.

2. Repeat this step. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the one-line or RCP element you intend to copy and accept it with <D>._ _______________ Steps 1. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Return to Step 2. the system displays the message Element not found. Select the Copy Element command. Modify 185 . Enter placement point Specify a location for the copied element. The Copy Element precision input form displays. Steps The system highlights the specified element. 9. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to copy. The system copies the element to the specified location in the design file. 3.

three-line fittings. three-line fittings. you can locate elements. 186 . page 119. and equipment pointers will also be moved. drop points. Using the form. see Precision Input Form. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and exit a command. For detailed information about precision input. and annotation. accept input. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. You can use this command to move one-lines. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. RCPs. and equipment pointers will also be moved. If an RCP is moved. All associated annotation. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. All associated annotation.February 2003 Move Element This command moves individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. If a one-line is moved. equipment pointers.

The message disappears when you identify a valid element. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 2. the system displays the message Element not found. The system moves the element to the specified location. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 3. Enter placement point Specify the new location for the element. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to move._ _______________ Steps 1. Modify 187 . Select the Move Element command. Steps The system highlights the specified element. Identify Raceway element Identify the element you intend to move and accept it with <D>. Return to Step 2. 9. The Move Element precision input form displays. Repeat this step.

Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. Using the form. route one-lines. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached.February 2003 Clone Element This command copies raceway elements multiple times to specified locations within the design file. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. 188 . see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. accept input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.

Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified element. Confirm (√) the number of times to clone the element. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Return to step 2. If you are placing more than one clone. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified element._ _______________ Steps 1. Modify 189 . Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the element you want to clone (copy) and accept it with <D>. The point you identify the element with becomes the origin of the copy. 2. 4. Select the Clone Element command. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. 3. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. The element highlights. Steps 9. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original element. The clone elements are placed in the design file. 5.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. 190 . and exit a command. If the first or last segment of a one-line is moved. Any one-lines attached to the RCP will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the attached RCP will also move. Also. For detailed information about precision input. any RCPs that are associated with a segment by a drop point will move only if the RCP and the drop point are coincident.February 2003 Move One-Line Segment This command moves one-line segments. At any point during this operating sequence. Segments attached to the moved one-line segment will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. reject input. accept input. page 119.

2. page 297 for more information on this toggle. The selected one-line segment highlights. 3. Steps 9. The system moves the segment to the specified location. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line segment to move. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. The point that identifies the one-line segment in this step will be reference point used when placing the one-line segment at the new location. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the one-line segment. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Select the one-line segment you want to move and accept it with <D>._ _______________ Steps 1. See Propagation Setup. Select the Move One-Line Segment command. Repeat this step. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Modify 191 .

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. also move with the vertex. For detailed information about precision input. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to move and accept it with <D>. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the attached RCP. 192 . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 119. reset a command action. At any point during this operating sequence. and equipment pointer annotation that is associated with the RCP. and exit a command. Select the Move One-Line Vertex command. you can locate elements. along with any annotation. equipment pointers. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Steps 1.February 2003 Move One-Line Vertex This command moves a one-line vertex. route one-lines. accept input. If a one-line end vertex is moved. The selected vertex highlights. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. Any segments attached to a moved vertex will stretch or shrink to maintain connection. 2. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

page 297 for more information on this toggle. Repeat this step._ _______________ 3. Modify 193 . See Propagation Setup. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line vertex. Move One-Line Vertex 9. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the vertex. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move.

you can locate elements. page 297 . page 314 . see Highlight Propagation Errors. route one-lines. This command displays to the screen the pro. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence.February 2003 Propagate Element This command expands one-line segments and RCPs into three-dimensional elements (a process called propagation). A description of some of the delivered fittings follows the operating sequence in this section. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. All other element will propagate depending on the specific situation of the element. To view errors that occur during propagation. 194 . You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. see Propagation Setup. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. reset a command action._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Using the form. For information about the form. page 119. The Propagate Element command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. Manually placed or edited fittings will propagate exactly as placed.err file. For detailed information about precision input.

The Project Run precision input form displays. 3. Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Reducers: fittings produced by propagating two or three intersecting one-line segments which have different raceway parameters._ _______________ Steps 1. Fittings 9. The system propagates the identified one-line and returns you to step 2 to continue identifying elements for propagation. 2. The attributes associated with each fitting are contained in the tray_part table in the reference database. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Crosses: fittings produced by propagating four intersecting one-line segments. page 507 . — OR — Exit the command. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line or RCP. 195 . Modify This section describes some of the fittings available with the delivered raceway one-line types. Elbows: fittings produced by propagating two intersecting one-line segments. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Identify Raceway element Identify a raceway one-line or RCP. Wyes: fittings produced by propagating three intersecting one-line segments. the system displays the message Element not found. Select the Propagate Element command. see Specification. Go to step 1. Go to step 2. Propagate Element The system highlights the specified element. Fittings are produced through propagation and can be divided into the following categories: Straights: fittings produced by propagating a one-line segment. For information about this table.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 The following illustrations detail some of the fittings available for each raceway one-line type: Tray Fittings Wireway Fittings 196 .

Modify 197 ._ _______________ Conduit Fittings Propagate Element 9.

etc.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting This command is used to edit fittings that have been manually placed in the design file. rigid. To change the displayed subtype. etc. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. The list contains available angles.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. page 214 . and Qualifier for the current specification. Options Remove RCP — Deletes an RCP from the design file. 198 . Modifying the value for Type also changes the active and available subtypes. select a value from the list. Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. select a value from the list. select a value from the list. You can only review the values in this field. wye. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. To change the displayed three-line type. To change the displayed qualifier. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. To change the displayed angle.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. Subtype. select an angle from the list or select the field. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. etc._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . straight. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow.) for that specification. inside vertical. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. and key in the new value. horizontal. See Remove RCP.

You can only review the information in this column.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. To change the displayed specification. — Column value . Spec1. To display the specification itself.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. and (if applicable) Spec2. You can also change any of the values for Type. To change a value. key in a negative angle._ _______________ When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). If straight is not your active Type. 199 . Subtype. and key in a new value. select a value from the list. To change the displayed length. Part — Displays the active part. select the corresponding Display button. Modify The specification form has these parameters: — Column name . You can review and modify the values in this column. Qualifier. and Qualifier. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. and key in the new value. Then select the field. 9. select the field. select the Override button. Subtype. the Length field does not display on the form. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. select a value from the list. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. To change the displayed part. The list contains all available specifications.

select the slide bar. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. — Override . if any. — Clear . Subtype. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. — Select . Type. Rotate Orientation — These fields define the orientation matrix: 200 .February 2003 — List . The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. see Annotate Element.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. then the largest fitting available is used. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. If only one row matches this criteria. which automatically activates it. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. If an * displays in the List column. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. page 178 . and Qualifier. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. See Spec1 for a description of the form. then that fitting is used. If more than one row matches the criteria. for the given Spec1. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. Automatic Fit — Correctly orients the fitting to the one-lines. select the *. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. Automatic Size — Automatically selects the appropriate size fitting base on the onelines connected to the fitting. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. then the column value has an associated codelist.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). Doing so displays a specification form. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. To display the codelist. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. To change the active placepoint._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. For a list of valid operators.

the form changes.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. material to feraloy. — About . the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. vendor to 3. OR Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. and key in a new value. type. In other words. and vendor display as the active attributes.) Edit/Insert Manual Fitting I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. To change the displayed axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. 9. if you set type to form 7c. and size to 1/2 inch. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. will be displayed in the size list. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Modify 201 . size. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. and vendor to 3. made of feraloy from vendor 3. select the field. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. if you set material to feraloy. you set the active Table to cond_body. Similarly. To change the displayed angle. material. select a table name from the list. For example. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. To change the active special part table. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. select the field. Secondary._ _______________ — Angle .

page 119 . When set to All. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. The list contains all available parts from the table. To change the active part. Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 202 . On the other hand. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. see Precision Input Form. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts. etc. When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table. Such fittings are called special parts. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. see the descriptions earlier in this section. select a part from the list. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values.February 2003 Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. regardless of the other attribute settings.) to construct the three-line symbols. For more information. Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. height. radius. you should first consider a few points.

Modify 203 . To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. 3. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting 9. The Edit/Insert Manual Fitting form displays. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database._ _______________ Steps 1. Edit the fitting as needed. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting or RCP you want to edit and accept it with <D>. Select Confirm when finished. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without editing the fitting or RCP. Go to step 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 2. Select the Edit/Insert Manual Fitting command. 4. set the toggle to Driven By Table.

For detailed information about precision input. you can locate elements. and exit a command. route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. The Modify One-Line precision input form displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form.February 2003 Modify One-Line This command modifies the route of an existing one-line. reset a command action. the system displays the message Element not found. Select the Modify One-Line command. You cannot modify the termination points of a one-line. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. When identified. page 119. the other segment appears as a dashed line. The dashed segment will then be modified. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. At any point during this operating sequence. 204 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you do not locate an acceptable element. 2. see Precision Input Form. You can reverse the segment to be modified by pressing <R>. The system highlights a valid one-line. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design. accept input. one segment of the one-line will display as a solid line with increased line weight. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You will identify the one-line to be modified at the point where modification should begin. Steps 1.

To terminate the new routes. — OR — Reset to return to the previous step. Raceway one-line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Part of the one-line displays with an increased line weight. — OR — Reject the one-line element as displayed. 6. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) once reverses the segments to be modified. place a data point on the original one-line. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command._ _______________ 3. and return to step 2. Reset Rotates Accept the cross section. You can press <R> (or Reject) to reject the last segment drawn. prompting you to Identify Raceway One-Line. 4. — OR — Reject the element. Accepting the element identifies the one-line for modification. or at the RCP containing the end of the one-line you are modifying. 5. — OR — Rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. Data Point Accepts. The one-line highlights. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) a second time rejects the one-line. Modify One-Line 9. while the part to be modified displays as a dashed line. Repeat this step. Go to step 2. Modify 205 . Go to step 2. The command reroutes the one-line according to your specifications. Enter next point Enter points to draw new one-line routes. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. Accept/reject Accept the one-line element as displayed.

— OR — Continue rotating the cross section.February 2003 The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. Accept the rotation and return to step 2. 206 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 7.

then that fitting is used. reject input. a LB fitting be placed. and exit a command. For example. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. one rule might define that at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. Using the form. See EE Databases. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. then the largest fitting available is used. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. For detailed information about precision input. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. page 119. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. accept input._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Place Fitting by Rule 9. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. reset a command action. You must define the rules in the reference database. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. 207 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Steps 1. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the RCP on which you want to place the fitting. Select the Place Fitting by Rule command. 2. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. 208 . displays. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP.

Select the Combine Coincident RCPs command. All coincident RCPs must be of the same one-line type. If Invalid. 209 . If no coincident RCPs are found. All RCPs must have a system in common. If coincident RCPs are found and can be combined. — OR — If coincident RCPs are found._ _______________ Combine Coincident RCPs Combine Coincident RCPs This command is used to check for coincident RCPs in the design file. then the RCPs can be merged. Steps 1. 9. Status — Defines if the RCPs can be merged. If Combinable. Systems — Displays which system each RCP belongs to. Combine — Merges the coincident RCPs into one RCP. you are given a choice of which RCP to keep. then you need to fix the coincident RCPs in your model. the Combine Coincident RCPs form displays listing the coincident RCP information. the message No coincident RCPs found displays and the command exits. Modify Each set of coincident RCPs is listed in the form separated by the horizontal dotted line. One-Line Type — Displays which one-line type each RCP belongs to. Connectivity is re-established for the attached one-lines after RCPs have been combined. RCPs can be combined if the following criteria are true: No more than four (4) RCPs are coincident.

4.February 2003 2. For each set of coincident RCPs. 210 . 3. Select the Combine button to merge that set of coincident RCPs. The status of the removed RCP changes to Combined. The RCPs are combined. select the RCP information on the form to highlight the associated elements in the model. changes to Kept. You can not combine RCPs that have an Invalid status. Choose which RCP in the set of RCPs you want to keep and leave that line highlighted._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and the Status of the remaining RCP. the one you selected.

Continue to select the one-line to keep and deleting the other. Choose which one-line out of each set you want to keep. For each set of duplicate one-lines in the form. Select the Delete button to delete the other one-line(s). then the Delete Duplicate One-Lines form displays. then the message No duplicate one-lines found displays and the command exits. The one-line is deleted and its Status changes to Deleted. select the one-line information on the form to highlight that one-line in the model. — OR — If duplicate one-lines are found. 4. Select Cancel when finished._ _______________ Delete Duplicate One-Lines This command is used to check for and correct duplicate one-lines (having only two vertices) that occupy the same geographical space and terminate on the same RCPs. 9. If no duplicate one-lines are found. The Status of the one-line you wanted to keep changes to Kept. 2. Select the Delete Duplicate One-Lines command. 5. The Status of the one-line you chose changes to Save. Each set of duplicate one-lines is listed in the form separated by a dotted horizontal line. 211 . Modify 3. Delete Duplicate One-Lines Steps 1.

RCPs (only if no one-lines are attached)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. reset a command action. reject input. the system displays the message Element not found. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. drop points. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines. you can locate elements. and exit a command. Steps 1. see Precision Input Form. accept input. The Delete Element precision input form displays. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Delete Element This command removes elements from the design file. At any point during this operating sequence. equipment pointers. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. Select the Delete Element command from the menu. 212 . Identify Raceway element Identify an element for deletion. 2. cosmetic graphics. and annotation. You can use this command to delete one-lines. The system highlights the specified element.

9._ _______________ — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. It also deletes all cross sections. propagated fittings. Modify 213 . Raceway [element] Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element for deletion. Delete Element If you accept the highlighted element. Return to step 2. annotation. the system deletes it. Return to Step 2. 3. and RCPs (unless shared by another one-line) that are associated with the selected element. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element.

page 119. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. At any point during this operating sequence. Once such an RCP is removed. see Precision Input Form. — The two attached one-lines belong to identical systems._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. unless the RCP has no one-lines attached. — The two attached one-lines are of the same one-line type. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.February 2003 Remove RCP This command removes a raceway connect point (RCP) from the design file. the two one-lines form a single one-line element. and exit a command. 214 . The command will remove an identified RCP only if all of the following conditions are true: — Two one-lines are attached to the RCP. reject input. If both onelines are annotated. Using the form. accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. the annotation for the second one-line is deleted. You cannot use the Delete Element commands to remove an RCP. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action.

Return to step 2. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP to remove. the system displays the message Element not found. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted RCP for deletion. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. 2. The system highlights the specified element._ _______________ Steps 1. Modify 215 . If you accept the RCP. the system prompts you to identify another. Select the Remove RCP command. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted RCP for deletion. Remove RCP 9. If you do not locate an acceptable RCP. 3. If you reject the RCP. The Remove RCP precision input form displays. the command deletes it or displays an error message to the screen. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Go to Step 2.

— OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Select the Delete Fitting command. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting. Steps 1. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted fitting and return to step 2. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted fitting and delete it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 216 . useful for removing manually placed special fittings (like pullboxes and conduit bodies) and replacing them with bends. to delete. 2. Return to step 2. or the fitting’s RCP.February 2003 Delete Fitting This command deletes the raceway fitting from a selected RCP. This command does not remove the RCP. 3.

Select the Remove One-Line Vertex command. 217 . Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to remove. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ Remove One-Line Vertex This command deletes an internal one-line vertex. 2. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. The selected vertex highlights. Modify Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You can not delete the end points of the one-line using this command. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. reset a command action. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 9. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. Remove One-Line Vertex Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. and exit a command. Using the form.

If Automatic Propagation is on.February 2003 3. Return to step 2. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted vertex as the one to remove. The vertex is removed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the one-line repropagates. 218 . — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted vertex and choose another one. Return to step 2.

see Precision Input Form. Using the form.) Minimize Joints Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. and exit a command. If automatic propagation is toggled on. (See Propagation Setup. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. Modify 219 . while retaining the original geometry of the one-line. reset a command action. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. 9._ _______________ Minimize Joints This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in an identified one-line. the command will repropagate the one-line. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. reject input. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

2. 220 .February 2003 Steps 1. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line to minimize the number of its vertices. the system displays the message Element not found. Select the Minimize Joints command from the menu. Go to step 2. 3. The system highlights a valid one-line. The Minimize Joints precision input form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Reject the element. Identify Raceway one line Identify a one-line in the design. Go to step 2. The command reduces the number of vertices comprising the one-line to a minimum (while retaining the original geometry).

If the Project Rule Set is not defined. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process._ _______________ Change System Parameters This command changes the system parameters. Change System Parameters Field Descriptions Primary System — Displays the primary system. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. 9. To clear the Project Rule. The primary system determines the symbology of the elements. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. 221 . then the Project Rule can be assigned. for the systems associated with a single raceway element. When a row is selected. select the *. Project Rules cannot be assigned. If an * displays in the List column. Systems — Displays all the systems associated with the selected element. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. the system Percent and the Project Rule. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. Modify Percent — Specifies the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product.

222 . Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. accept input. Using the form. 4.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. — OR — Exit the command. The selected element is changed to reflect you selections. you can locate elements. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. Select the Change System Parameters command. 2. 5. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. For detailed information about precision input. Steps 1. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The precision input form displays. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without making any changes to the selected element. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. and exit a command. The identified element highlights. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

Modify Group Commands You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. reviews. and so forth). and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. copy. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Topics 9. and delete elements of specified groups. then selecting Modify Group Commands._ _______________ Modify Group Commands The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. and to review or edit element annotation. then selecting Palette. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Annotate Element by Group — Places. annotation. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. three-lines. 223 . You can also propagate one-lines in a particular group using these commands. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Modify Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 224 . Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line.February 2003 Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group.

three-lines. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. See Setup Commands. page 119 . 225 . For detailed information about precision input. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. not MicroStation manipulation commands. you should use these commands. For reliable results. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Group commands. Group Workflow You must use the Define Group command to create and activate an element group before using other Modify Group commands. any time you are modifying raceway elements. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. see Precision Input Form. you can use these commands throughout the design session. 9. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ Using the Modify Group Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. annotation. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Using the Modify Group Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. and so forth). page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands.

you can manipulate the group as a whole or in part. If the toggle is set to Entire Group. If the toggle is set to Single Element. To enter a group name. The active group is highlighted in the list. select the group name key-in field. Identifying the contents of an existing group can be done graphically. 226 . and key in a name. Single Element/Entire Group — Determines how Modify Group commands will act upon existing groups. then a command will prompt you once to accept/reject the specified group as a whole before performing the command action.February 2003 Define Group This command compiles a group from elements you specify. Use caution when you are manipulating groups in Entire Group mode. Once you have defined a group of Raceway elements using this command. A group is a temporary association of Raceway elements in your model. however. Create — Creates a group containing the elements you specify in the EE Element Types list. then a command will prompt you to accept/reject every element within a specified group before performing the command action. you should assign your groups meaningful names that reflect their contents. Available Groups — Lists the groups you have already created. using the Hilite option. select a group from the list. In general. The key-in field above the list accepts input for group name when you are defining a new group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system prompts you just once to accept/reject a group for manipulation. The system adds the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. All groups you create using this command are dropped when you exit the EE Raceway design session. To change the active group.

select Add to. Copy — Copies the specified contents of one group to a new group. select Drop. If you remove all elements from a group. You must choose at least one element type when creating. 9. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. and then select Accept. to equipment. three-lines. key in a group name. the system automatically drops the entire group. and all annotation. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. To initiate the Drop from action. To initiate the Drop operation. The system drops the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. select the button. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. and then select Accept. and key in a new group name. and select Hilite. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements the new group contains. Define Group To initiate the Add to operation. select Copy. drop points. Clear Hilite — Clears all highlighting placed in the design when you use the Hilite command. It is not necessary to select Accept._ _______________ To initiate the Create operation. To initiate the Hilite action. review the form message display for information about the number of elements dropped from the group. Modify 227 . select an existing group from the Available Groups list. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. When processing is complete. Hilite — Highlights in the design file the entire contents of an existing group. When processing is complete. adding elements to. Types include one-lines. Drop from — Removes elements you specify in the EE Element Types list from an existing group. The system then compiles a group according to your specifications. Add to — Adds elements you specify from the EE Element Types list to an existing group. When processing is complete. select Drop from. review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements added to the group. or dropping elements from a group. and select Accept. RCPs. select a group from the Available Groups list. Drop — Removes the active group (the highlighted group in the Available Groups list). To initiate the Copy action. The system automatically highlights the group contents in the drawing. and then select Accept. EE Element Types — Displays all available element types available for inclusion in or deletion from a group.

Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. 228 . EE Method — This list displays optional restrictions for the items selected in the EE Element Types list. onelines. – One-Line Type . You can select individual one-line types from this list. and so forth) belonging to that system will be included in your group. only those element types (RCPs. and so forth) belonging to that one-line type will be included in your group. When you select a one-line type from this list. Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the One-Line Type list. You can use the three options in this list to restrict the elements in your group to those belonging to particular one-line types or systems. or you can select all displayed systems (using Select All)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When you select a system from this list. Once you have displayed the System list. you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before you can select the Accept button on the main form. three-lines. Clear All — Clears all selected element types from the EE Element Types list.Displays a list of available systems. – System . or you can select all displayed one-line types (using Select All). three-lines. you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before selecting the Accept button on the main form.Displays a list of available element types from which you can define selection attributes.Displays a list of available one-line types. You can select individual systems from this list. one-lines. – Attributes . only those element types (RCPs.February 2003 Select All — Selects every element type from the EE Element Types list.

For example. – Fence Shape .Drops from or includes in a group all specified element types in the design.Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence block you place in the design. if you identified one-line trays for insertion into a group.Drops from or includes in a group those specified elements types contained in a view you identify.Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence shape you place in the design. – Selection . and select Fence Block from this list. select the Accept button on the main form. 9. insertion into groups.Prompts you to identify specified element types in the design file to drop from or include in a group. – View . To reset out of the attribute list form and disregard the attributes. – All Elements . Define Group Graphic Method — Displays the available methods for selecting group elements. Once you have defined the attributes._ _______________ When you select an element type from this list. the system inserts into the group only those one-line trays contained within the fence you place. You will use these methods to identify elements for group creation. – Fence Block . These methods can serve to further restrict the element types you are including in your group. Modify 229 . or deletion from groups. an attribute list form displays for that element type in which you can specify the attributes to include in the group identification. select the Cancel (X) button on the attribute form.

EE Method.February 2003 Steps 1. — Select the Process button at the top of the form. — Use the EE Element Types._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and Graphic Method lists to define which elements to place in the group and how you want to select them in the design file. Select one of the group modification commands. — OR — Select one of the available group from the list 3. — Select the Create button under Group Operations. The group is created. The number of elements added to the group displays at the bottom of the form. 2. 230 . Create a group of elements: — Key in a name for the group in the field provided. select your elements for the group. Select the Define Group command. The Groups form displays. — Using the Graphic Method you defined. 4. Set the Entire Group/Single Element and Hilite On/Hilite Off toggles the way you want.

route one-lines. You must define a temporary group of elements. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. you can locate elements. go to step 4. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. — If you have a fence in the design. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Copy Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. 9. Using the form. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. see Precision Input Form. 231 . go to step 2. the message No active group defined displays. At any point during this operating sequence. see Define Group. page 226. Select the Copy Element by Group command from the menu. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. using the Define Group command. reset a command action. Steps 1. and exit a command. 2. accept input. Modify The Copy by Group precision input form displays. If you have not defined a group. A fence group overrides the active group. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form._ _______________ Copy Element by Group This command copies all or selected valid elements in the active group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group. page 119. go to step 3.

4. Repeat this step. If there are group elements that remain uncopied. Otherwise. Enter placement point Enter a point for the location of the element you are copying. The system returns you to step 3 if there are group elements that remain uncopied. — OR — Reject the element you are copying. 6. Otherwise. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. the command exits automatically. The command exits automatically. 232 . the command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the active group. The system copies the element as specified._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. Elements within the active group highlight. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Otherwise.February 2003 3. Define origin Enter a point to use as a base for the group copy. you are returned to step 3. 5. — OR — Reject the highlighted element.

and key in the new value. Intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. the field remains null. straights. Annotate Element by Group 9. reviews. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. however. select the field. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database._ _______________ Annotate Element by Group This command places. You can review and modify the values in this field. using your keyboard space bar. Once you have deleted the override. and edits intelligent annotation for some or all raceway elements associated with a specified group. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. three-lines. and fittings. 233 . To change the values associated with the element. Modify Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. Using this command. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). you are allowed only to review the annotation (read only access). To delete an override on a reference database attribute. Otherwise. You can enter blank spaces into the design. For straights and fittings. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. enter nothing into the design. select the column value field and delete the blank character. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. Empty <Return>s. You can only review the Column name column information.

To change the displayed value. The key field is updated. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. select the *.February 2003 If blanks exist for a field. 234 . the value is saved back to user data. Where UD displays in the column. Otherwise. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. If Dgn displays in the column. then the value derives from the reference database. and key in a new value. the value will display in the design where you place it. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. the corresponding column value comes from user data. then the value has been defined from the design file. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. If Ref displays in the column. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. Access column — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. The next time you enter the annotation form. the key specified in the user element is used. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. it becomes an override key to the reference database. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. Where the toggle is On. You can only review the information in this column. List column — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. the field remains null. If you change a column value. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. If an * displays in the List column. To display the codelist. Display On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the design display for each column value. If you can only view (read) the column value. You can only review the information in this field. where New had displayed. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. you can modify it. but cannot delete it. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. Source — Dislays the source of the corresponding column value. When modified. If no key exists in the user element. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. Once you place an override key on an element. the Access column displays a R/W. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. the Default key is used._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you delete the value in this field. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. then it will display an R. select the field.

_ _______________ Global/Single — Determines whether or not the annotation modifications you are making to the specified element will be applied to all identical element types within the group. If more than one row matches the criteria. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). then a second form containing all matching rows displays. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. setting the toggle to Global while annotating an RCP will change the annotation for all RCPs within the group when you select Confirm (√). Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. and then select Confirm (√). Modify 235 . 9. If the toggle is set to Single for the same RCP annotation. If you select Cancel (X). then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. Annotate Element by Group From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. the system will modify annotation only for that RCP when you select Confirm (√). Available operators are described later in this section. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. select the row you want. which automatically activates it. For example. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form.

page 119. see Precision Input Form. This operator is a wild card. (For information about the command. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. page 226 . You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Types numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 236 . you can locate elements. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements.) Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. accept input. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. see Define Group. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. route one-lines. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. using the Define Group command. At any point during this operating sequence. If you do not enter another operator. reject input. the system assumes =.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. reset a command action. representing zero or more characters. representing a single character. This operator is a wild card. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. Using the form. A fence group overrides the active group.

The system highlights another group element. 4. 237 . Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. Select the Annotate Element by Group command from the menu._ _______________ Steps 1. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. The system displays the Annotate Element form for the identified element. 3. — If there is not a fence in the design. 5. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. 6. go to step 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted group element. The command exits automatically. — OR — Annotate Element by Group 9. Modify Reject the highlighted group element. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. The Annotate by Group precision input form displays. — If you have a fence in the design. go to step 2. reset <R> to skip. Go to step 1. 2. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. the command exits. The prompt indicates the column alias you are placing. If no group elements remain. Repeat this step. Go to Step 3. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. The system highlights the group contents.

238 .February 2003 Position the column value. these values are loaded into the project database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . displayed. The new value displays in the design file. the system places the same annotation for all identical element types in the group. — OR — If you set the toggle to Single. optionally. the system returns you to step 3 to annotate other elements within the group. Go to step 3. Go to step 3. The system places all new displayed annotation for the specified element. When you load the project database. If you set the toggle to Global. Any value placed with the Annotate Element by Group command will be entered into the drawing and. When there are no more values to place for the element type. and place a data point. the system prompts you to annotate other element types within the group.

For detailed information about precision input. 2. If you have not defined a group. You must define a temporary group of elements. reset a command action. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 4. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. go to step 2. reject input. Modify The Clone Group precision input form displays. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. A fence group overrides the active group. Clone Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. go to step 3. using the Define Group command._ _______________ Clone Element by Group This command copies the active group multiple times. route one-lines. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. see Precision Input Form. the message No active group defined displays. 239 . accept input. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group. Using the form. see Define Group. page 226. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. 9. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. useful when the same elements are to be placed at regular intervals. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. Steps 1. you can locate elements. — If you have a fence in the design. Select the Clone Group command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.

Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified group. If you are placing more than one clone. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Repeat this step. The clone elements are placed in the design file. Go to step 6. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 7.February 2003 3. 8. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. 240 . 6. Confirm (√) the number of time to clone the group. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. — OR — Reject the active group. 4. the command exits automatically. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Otherwise. The command exits automatically. 5. Return to step 2. Define origin Identify a point in the group to use as the origin for the copies.

A fence group overrides the active group. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. 9. This command displays to the screen the pro. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Propagate by Group command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. The Project by Group precision input form displays. At any point during this operating sequence. page 297 . You must define a temporary group of elements. see Propagate Element. see Precision Input Form. Propagate by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. accept input. For information about using this command. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. — If you have a fence in the design. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. route one-lines. go to step 2. you can locate elements. page 226. reset a command action. and exit a command. page 314 . Select the Propagate by Group command from the menu. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. page 194 . Modify Steps 1. Using the form. go to step 3. using the Define Group command._ _______________ Propagate by Group This command expands into three-dimensional elements all or selected valid one-line segments and RCPs from the active group. reject input. see Define Group. 241 . see Highlight Propagation Errors. For a description of some of the delivered fittings. go to step 4. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Propagation Setup. For information about the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.err file. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory). To view errors that occur during propagation. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command.

— If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. the command exits automatically. or until you exit the command. the command propagates all valid elements within the fence. 3. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. and then highlights another group element for propagation. The system highlights another group element for propagation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and exits automatically. 4. If no group elements remain. go to step 3. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the command exits automatically. The command exits automatically. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to manipulate them as a group. The system propagates every element belonging to the group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The system propagates the element. or until you exit the command. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. 242 . Go to step 1.February 2003 2. If no group elements remain for propagation. — OR — Reject the active group. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element.

Using the form. page 226. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. For example. 9. see Precision Input Form. accept input. A fence group overrides the active group. then the largest fitting available is used. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. one rule might define that a CLB fitting be placed at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. reset a command action. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. You must define the rules in the reference database. reject input. Place Fitting by Rule by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule by Group This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. Modify You must define a temporary group of elements. then that fitting is used. See EE Databases. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. At any point during this operating sequence. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. see Define Group. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. 243 . route one-lines. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and exit a command. page 119. using the Define Group command. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size.

go to step 2. the command exits automatically. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The command exits automatically.February 2003 Steps 1. Select the Place Fitting by Rule by Group command. 3. If you have not defined a group. — If you have a fence in the design. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. The Group Place Fitting by Rule precision input form displays. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Repeat this step. 4. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Otherwise. 2. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . go to step 3. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 244 . — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the message No active group defined displays. go to step 4. displays. — OR — Reject the active group.

see Define Group. The Add Systems form displays. If you try to add a system that already exists on the element. using this command you can add an alarm and control system to an existing element with a communication system. page 226 . The system(s) is added. Add Systems Group Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. Press <D> to accept the group as the one to add systems to. Modify 245 . For example. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. It will only append systems to the element._ _______________ Add Systems Group This command defines multiple systems for a single one-line. 3. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. the system defined at placement. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and command. it will not be duplicated. Steps 1. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. 2. The group that the systems will be added to highlights. Select the Add Systems Group command. 9. Select the system or systems you want to add and select Confirm (√). This command will not change the master system.

Field Descriptions Systems — This button allows the selection of the active system. Subsystem — This button allows the selection of subsystems. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. This command performs a total replacement of all systems. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem.February 2003 Replace Systems by Group This command changes the defined active system(s) for a group. that is._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Project Rules cannot be assigned. all defined systems for the group are removed and replaced by the new systems. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s "project" table. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. 246 . When a new active system is selected. Percent — Displays the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. use this command when you want to change an existing high voltage tray to a low voltage tray. Changing the active system will cause the graphic symbology to change to the symbology define for the new system. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. Systems — Displays all the available systems. For example. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. the subsystem are all unselected. While this button is depressed. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent.

To clear the Project Rule. The active group is changed to the new system type. Modify 2. Press <D> to accept the group. A network may be thought of as all RCPs. Select the Replace Systems by Group command. then the Project Rule can be assigned. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. When a row is selected. If an * displays in the List column. Select the new system type from the form and select Confirm (√). page 226 . a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. see Define Group. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. The active group to be changed highlights. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. one-lines. Replace Systems by Group Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. You can not replace a system on just one element in a network of elements that have connectivity. The Replace Systems form displays. drop points. 247 ._ _______________ List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Steps 1. 9. and so forth that are associated through a series of graphically connected one-lines. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. select the *. you must define a group that contains all elements that have connectivity. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and the command. 3. When defining the group for this command.

) Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. see Define Group. and exit a command. 248 .February 2003 Minimize Joints by Group This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in valid one-line(s) within the active group. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 226. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. route one-lines. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. (See Propagation Setup. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. If automatic propagation is toggled on.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. using the Define Group command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119. accept input. You must define a temporary group of elements. reject input. you can locate elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the command will repropagate each affected one-line. At any point during this operating sequence. A fence group overrides the active group. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line(s).

The Minimize Joints Group precision input form displays. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. The system minimizes the number of vertices comprising the one-line. 9. The command exits automatically. the vertices of all one-lines within the fence are reduced to a minimum number. Accept/reject Group ([group name]) 249 . Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Minimize Joints by Group — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. 4. Repeat this step. the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the highlighted one-line. go to step 4. if any remain. Go to step 3. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. and the command exits automatically. go to step 2. — If you have a fence in the design. go to step 3. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line. the system prompts you to minimize the number of vertices for each one-line within the fence. the command exits automatically. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. The system then identifies another valid one-line in the group. Modify 3. and then identifies another valid one-line within the group (if any remain). Repeat this step. Select the Minimize Joints by Group command from the menu. 2. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form._ _______________ Steps 1.

— OR — Reject the active group. The command exits automatically.February 2003 Accept the active group. The command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 250 . The system minimizes the number of vertices for all valid one-line elements within the group.

you can locate elements. Steps 1. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. and the command exits automatically. Go to step 3. accept input. 251 . see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. and exit a command. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. go to step 3. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. using the Define Group command. If you have not defined a group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. 2. see Define Group. 9. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. the message No active group defined displays. Using the form. Select the Delete Element by Group command from the menu. the contents of the group are deleted. the system prompts you to delete each element within the fence. go to step 4. go to step 2. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. page 226. Modify — If you have a fence in the design. route one-lines. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form._ _______________ Delete Element by Group This command deletes all or selected valid elements in an active group from the design file. A fence group overrides the active group. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Delete by Group precision input form displays. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. At any point during this operating sequence. Delete Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements.

Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system deletes the element. Repeat this step. the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the active group. The system prompts you to delete another group element if any remain for deletion. the command exits automatically.February 2003 The command exits automatically. The system deletes all valid elements within the group. The command exits automatically. The command exits automatically. 4. and prompts you to delete another group element. 252 . If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 3. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion.

10. Your system/application manager should ensure that the reference database contains the necessary systems and one-line types before you use these commands. RCPs. Setup Commands In a new design file. Symbology Control — Defines. report IDs. and symbology settings for your design file. reviews. Define One-Line Type — Selects any or all available one-line types from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. and modifies the raceway default parameters for symbols. Set Symbology Control — Selects the standard graphic symbology control for all systems and one-line types in a design file. Commands Set Raceway Defaults — Defines. model annotation._ _______________ 10. working view. Cell Creation Commands — Create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. and modifies the graphic symbology control for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command. and cross sections. and modifies the default parameters for text. systems. and modify the default parameters. Define System — Selects any or all systems from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. then selecting Palette from the resulting pulldown menu. reviews. Set Conduit Sizing Attributes — Defines which conduit attributes will be used selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. Set Text Defaults — Defines. text nodes. Setup 253 . reviews. The Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Setup Commands The Setup commands allow you to define. review. and engineering units. one-line types. you must use the Setup commands before using any other command group.

February 2003 Model Commands — Place and manipulate a model information in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 254 .

Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Some of the setups performed by this group of commands are required for later design work and database operations. see the appropriate command descriptions._ _______________ Using the Setup Commands When to Use These Commands You will typically use Setup commands when you enter a design file for the first time. you must have defined at least one system and one-line type from the database using the Define System and Define One-Line Type commands. 10. Using the Setup Commands Before Using These Commands You must have a valid reference database attached to your design file before using the Setup commands. For individual command prerequisites. Setup 255 . Group Workflow Before using the symbology commands in this group (Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control).

existing systems. symbol defaults. see Define Duct Cross Section. such as Color or Active Angle. Margin Width — Defines the distance. define. You will enter all raceway default values through the EE Raceway Defaults form. and key in a new value. You can review. and/or modify the settings. see Define Duct Cross Section. You can review. The system uses these settings when annotating the model either during cell creation or after you have placed one in the design file. It also allows you to view the reference database contents for RCP. select the field. Use the Set Symbology Control to make changes to individual. Cross Section — Displays the default Scale Factor and Rotation Angle for cross sections. and the shell of the duct bank when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. Global Symbology — Displays the default symbology settings for Model Annotation. Default settings are applied to new systems created in or added to a design file. and key in a new value. To change a displayed value. select the field. reviews. Parameters — Displays the EE Raceway default digitizing parameters. and key in a new value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . define. page 164 for more information. select the field. Changes in these fields do not affect existing systems. You can review. including cross section parameters. 256 . page 164 for more information. define. Use these fields to set the default symbology for different systems in a design file. and modifies raceway defaults. To change a displayed value. between the routed cable/conduit. in sub-units. represented by the matrix buttons. Duct — Specifies whether to use conduit or cable when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. and/or modify the values in these fields.February 2003 Set Raceway Defaults This command defines. and/or modify any of the values in these fields. and Raceway Connect Point (RCP) parameters. To change a displayed value.

and/or modify the value in this field. Additionally. select the field. The working view determines the orientation of text and cells you place through precision input. equipment pointer. 2. and key in a new value. To display the current default data from the database for a particular element (RCP. or drop point). and drop point annotation. select the field. The EE Raceway Defaults form displays. Symbols — Displays the names of the cells that represent equipment pointers and drop points. select the slide bar. Set Raceway Defaults Steps 1. Select the Set Raceway Defaults command. You can review. To change the current working view. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit without saving your changes. define. The information will display in the scrollable list in the lower right corner of the form. Setup 257 . RCP — Displays the Default Weight for RCPs. To change a displayed value. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. and drag it along the scale until the desired view number displays._ _______________ Working view — Displays the current working view for the design file. Default Key — Displays the current default keys for RCP (raceway connect point). select first the key field and then the Display button. You can only view this data. and key in a new value. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. define. You can review. precision input uses the working view to place and locates points in the design. and/or modify this key. 10. This value will also become the default RCP weight on the Symbology Control form. To change the displayed value. The scale includes views 1 through 8. 3. equipment pointer.

so as to avoid duplication of elements. Select the Define System command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To define ALL systems from the reference database in the present design file. To remove ALL systems from definition in the design file. 258 . Caution should be used when adding these to the database. The systems you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√).February 2003 Define System This command allows you to select any or all available systems from the reference database for use in the design file. — OR — Select those systems listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. Steps 1. select the Clear All button. Select the systems in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. If you need systems not available to you. as well as those already selected for the current design file. you must have at least one system defined in the design file. In order to place one-lines. 2. The System Definition form displays those systems available for selection from the reference database. select the Select All button. The System Definition form displays.

Define System 10. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command._ _______________ The systems you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. 3. Setup 259 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.

you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. The One Line Type Definition form displays those oneline types available in the database. You must define one-line types for the design file before you can use related commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select the Select All button. 2. Select the one-line types in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. as well as those already selected for the current design file. To remove ALL one-line types from definition in the design file. such as Set Active One-Line Type and Place One-Line Type.February 2003 Define One-Line Type This command allows you to select any or all available one-line types from the reference database for use in the design file. The one-line types you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). select the Clear All button. Steps 1. Select the Define One-Line Type command. The One Line Type Definition form displays. 260 . To define ALL one-line types from the reference database in the design file. — OR — Select those one-line types listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. If you need one-line types not available to you. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. so as to avoid duplication of elements.

Setup 261 . 10. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Define One-Line Type The one-line types you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes._ _______________ 3.

Before Using This Command You must have defined at least one system and one-line type in the design file. all symbology is taken from the system defaults._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you must first use the Set Symbology Control command to specify the systems and one-line types that can be changed. You can also modify the system default symbology details if necessary. Therefore. When you enter a new design file. page 264 . those oneline types will use a system default. The Symbology Control command allows you to set up the symbology details for all the override cases within a system. to make any changes in symbology. page 258 and Define One-Line Type. 262 .February 2003 Set Symbology Control This command defines the standard graphic symbology for all systems and one-line types in a design file. For more information. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays a matrix of systems and one-line types and the standard graphic symbology assigned to each system (all one-line types within a system are originally assigned the same symbology). In cases where you do not specify overrides for the one-line types within a system. You can specify the one-line types for which to change the standard symbology by setting them to override mode. see Define System. For more information. see Symbology Control. page 260 .

_ _______________ Steps 1. 3. The Override settings you selected are deleted from the Override field and the default settings restored. 10. The Override setting displays in the appropriate field(s). select the individual area that matches a system and one-line type to "turn on" an override for that case. Select the Set Symbology Control command. 2. — OR — Select a one-line type from the list to "turn on" the override for that type in all systems. Using your cursor. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays. — OR — Steps Toggle the Available button in each field to None to change the defaults symbology for all one-line types within a system. To turn off ALL selected Override settings. — OR — Select the individual Override settings you wish to "turn off" (return to default status). select the No Overrides button. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Each one-line type within the system will then have its own symbology defined. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Setup 263 . so default symbology is not necessary for that system.

One Line Type Overrides — Displays the one-line type within the displayed system for which you can change the symbology settings. Symbology — Displays the symbology settings for the selected system and one-line type. and key in a system name. The Symbology Control form displays the current symbology settings for all systems and corresponding one-line types. select another system from the list. The display list contains a list of available one-line types within the currently displayed system. To change the displayed one-line type (or system default). select another one-line type from the list. You must have at least one system and one-line type defined for the design file in order to use this command. or select the field.February 2003 Symbology Control This command defines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The display list contains a list of available systems. select the field. 264 . or select the field. To change the displayed system. To change a value in the list. page 262 for more information about this command). You can review and edit these settings. System Default will display in the One-Line Type display list. If you have not set overrides for all one-line types within a system. and key in a new value. reviews. and modifies the graphic symbology for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command (see Set Symbology Control. and key in the new value. System — Displays the system for which you can currently change the symbology settings.

Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements._ _______________ Steps 1. Setup 265 . 2. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Select the Symbology Control command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Symbology Control 10. The Symbology Control form displays. 3.

select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. Width — Displays the default text width in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). and engineering units. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list.February 2003 Set Text Defaults This command defines. text nodes. or select a value from the list. Line length — Displays the default length for lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). 266 . Text Nodes — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text nodes in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. Line spacing — Displays the default vertical spacing between lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Text String — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text strings in the design file. and modifies the MicroStation default parameters for text. Height — Displays the default text height in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Field Descriptions Font — Displays the default font style number. To change the current text node justification. or select a value from the list. reviews. You will enter all values using the Text form. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. To change the current text string justification.

Sub units. 2. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. You can only review the displayed settings. The Text form displays._ _______________ Engineering Units — These fields (Master units. 10. Setup 267 . Select the Set Text Defaults command. Set Text Defaults Steps 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 3. and Positional units) display the current PDS engineering units. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements.

— THEN — Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the form. 2. 268 . The Set Conduit Sizing Attributes form displays. Steps 1. Define which attributes to use. Select the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the form without saving any changes.February 2003 Set Conduit Sizing Attributes This command defines which conduit attributes will be used in selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command.

EE Raceway is delivered with a sample cell library. Create Cell Commands 10. rway. Create Drop Point Cell — Creates a drop point symbol for later placement in the design file. which resides in win32app\eerway\dgn._ _______________ Create Cell Commands The Create Cell commands create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. Setup 269 . The cells you create using this command are stored. This section contains detailed descriptions of the following commands: Create Model Cell — Creates or recreates a model cell to carry the sheet name of a drawing. You must have write access to the library before modifying it. and modify the copied version. You must have a cell library attached to the design file in order to activate the Create Cell commands. If you want to modify the delivered library.cel. copy it to a nonproduction directory. in your cell library. Create Equipment Pointer Cell — Creates an equipment pointer symbol for later placement in the design file. along with all existing cells.

To display a list of available cell libraries. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Create Cell commands. 270 . Before Using These Commands You must have a cell library with read/write privileges attached to the design file. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the Create Cell commands. page 119 . you can use these commands throughout the design session._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Precision Input Form.February 2003 Using the Create Cell Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. For detailed information about precision input. key in rc= in the MicroStation Command Window.

_ _______________
Create Model Cell
Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Create Model Cell

This command allows you to create a model cell and to store that cell permanently in your cell library.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Model button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

10. Setup

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to Accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

271

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 10. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing sheet, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

272

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Model Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

273

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Create Equipment Pointer Cell
This command allows you to create a equipment pointer symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the To Equipment button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

274

_ _______________
6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

Create Equipment Pointer Cell

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing equipment tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip

10. Setup

For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

275

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

276

_ _______________
Create Drop Point Cell

Create Drop Point Cell

This command allows you to create a drop point symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Your cell library must contain a drop point cell for the placement of onelines in the design file (the drop point establishes connectivity between an RCP and a one-line where the two are of a different one-line type). Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Drop Point button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point

10. Setup

Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. 5. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

277

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing drop point tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

278

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Drop Point Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

279

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Model Commands
These commands are used to place and manipulate model information in your design file.

Commands
Lock Model — Locks the symbology control parameters, the defined systems, and the defined one-line types. Move Model Annotation — Moves the model annotation within the design file.

Unlock Model — Unlocks the model.

Annotate Model — Adds, changes, or reviews the sheet name in a model.

280

_ _______________
Using the Model Commands When to Use These Commands
You may want to use the Lock Model command after performing basic design setups to lock the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. However, you can use these commands throughout the design session. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Using the Model Commands

Before Using These Commands
You should complete the symbology and basic design file setups before locking the model. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Model commands, because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119 .

Group Workflow
Before you can annotate or move annotation in the model, you must have locked the model using the Lock Model command.

Operating Information
During the operating sequence for any of these commands, you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

10. Setup

281

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Lock Model
This command locks the model. The locking of the model locks the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. Therefore, you should lock your model after setup, but before placing graphics in a file in order to protect your parameters. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Steps
1. Select the Lock Model command. The model is locked. If the model was locked when you selected this command, the message Model is already locked displays.

282

Select the Move Model Annotation command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. 10. page 119. accept input. and exit a command. Enter placement point Move the annotation to the desired location. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — OR — Exit the command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. reject input. The command checks the design file for the existing model annotation and places it in drag mode._ _______________ Move Model Annotation This command moves the model annotation within a design. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. The Move Model Annotation precision input form displays. Move Model Annotation Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. 2. Setup 283 . route one-lines. Steps 1. and place it. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.

2. If you want to change the symbology control or add new systems and one-line types to a model that has been locked. Select Confirm (√) to unlock the model. 284 . Select the Unlock Model command. 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without unlocking the model._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you must first unlock the model using this command. A warning form displays.February 2003 Unlock Model This command unlocks the model. Steps 1.

3. however. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. Select Confirm (√) to accept the new annotation. Select the Annotate Model command. Steps 1. The Load Database process. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. 10. 2._ _______________ Annotate Model Annotate Model This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. Setup 285 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. If you want to display the annotation in the model. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. will prevent such duplication. 4. The Annotate Element form displays. If you toggled Display to On.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 286 .

modify. 287 . Propagation Setup — Sets the active parameters for propagation in the design file. Display Element Information — Displays characteristics of selected elements. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. based on the current active one-line type. Runtime Setup Commands The Runtime Setup commands allow you to define. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. Set Active Levels — Displays the current active level(s) and allows you to turn Off displayed levels and to turn On new level displays. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to set a new active system. and allows you to set new active parameters. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. Runtime Commands Set Active One-Line Parameters — Displays the active one-line parameters. Runtime Setup Commands 11._ _______________ 11. The Runtime Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EE Raceway Command Menu Bar.

Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Before Using These Commands You must have at least one system and one-line type defined in the design file in order to use these commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 288 . Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.February 2003 Using the Runtime Setup Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. See Setup Commands. page 253 for more information about defining systems and one-line types.

then the Active TRAY Parameters form will display when you use this command. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. which is based on the current active one-line type. if you defined tray as your active one-line type. select the column value field and delete the blank character. page 294 ). You can review and modify the values in this field. Once you have deleted the override. You can only review the information in this field. If blanks exist for a field. When you change the active one-line type or end your design session. The previous set of specifications becomes active again. Runtime The Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command allows you to enter values through the appropriate form. You can enter blank spaces into the design. 289 . Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified one-line type. Save to Memory (M) — Temporarily saves your overrides and specification changes. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. Otherwise. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11._ _______________ Set Active One-Line Type Parameters This command displays the active one-line parameters based on the current active one-line type you set using the Set Active One-Line Type command (see Set Active One-Line Type. select this field. the field remains null. For example. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. but empty <Return>s enter nothing into the design. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. and key in the new value. To change the values associated with a one-line type. you lose the overrides and specifications you saved to memory.

February 2003 List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. You can only review the information in this column. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. and key in a new value. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. If you delete the value in this field. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. select the field. To change the displayed value. You can only review the information in this field. Otherwise. select the *._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the field remains null. EE Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key in the reference database. it becomes an override key to the reference database. but cannot delete it. The key field is updated. you can modify it. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. then it will display an R. If you can only view (read) the column value. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. the value will display in the design where you place it. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. the Default key is used. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. the key specified in the user element is used. If an * displays in the List column. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. the Access column displays a R/W. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the design display for each column value. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. If no key exists in the user element. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. 290 . Where the toggle is On. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. To display the codelist. Once you place an override key on an element. Key Description — This field displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. then the column value has a corresponding codelist.

To add values from the displayed specification table rows. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. 291 . You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table._ _______________ If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. If you select Cancel (X). If more than one row matches the criteria. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. which automatically activates it. Override button — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). and then select Confirm (√). Runtime From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. select the row you want. Clear button — This button clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form.

This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. If you do not enter another operator. Select the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. representing zero or more characters. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. 2. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 292 . > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Steps 1. representing a single character. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. This operator is a wild card. An Active One-Line Type Parameters form displays. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. 3. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. the system assumes =. This operator is a wild card. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.

_ _______________ Any value you place with the Set Active One-line Parameters command will be entered into the drawing and. Runtime 293 . When you load the project database. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. these values are loaded into the project database. optionally. displayed.

February 2003 Set Active One-Line Type This command displays all one-line types available in the design file. The one-line type you selected highlights. based on your selections from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command (see Define One-Line Type. 294 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select the Set Active One-Line Type command. The command also highlights the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new one from the set of those available. 2. From the list. The Active One Line Type form displays. Steps 1. select the one-line type you want to make active. You must set an active one-line type in order to use the Place One-Line Type command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. page 260 ). Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command.

Systems Column — Displays all the available systems. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. Subsystem — Selects the subsystems. Runtime Field Descriptions Systems — Selects the active system. Using the Set Active System form. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. While this button is depressed. Project Rules cannot be assigned. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems._ _______________ Set Active System This command displays the current active system and all available systems. Set Active System 11. This is done by specifying a system and one or more subsystems. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. page 258 ). you can select a new active system from the set of those available. the subsystems are all unselected. You can have multiple systems defined for a single one-line type as a way of defining split trays or elements. You can have no more than six systems active for each one-line type. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. When a new active system is selected. Active System — Displays the active system which determines the symbology of the raceway. based on those you selected from the reference database using the Define System command (see Define System. The active system determines the symbology of the one-line type. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. whereas subsystems do not. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. 295 .

— OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.February 2003 Percent — Displays the current percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. 2. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. The Active System form displays. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. then a Project Rule can be assigned. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. Select the Set Active System command. To clear the Project Rule. 3. Define the percentages and the project rules you want to use. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. When a row is selected. Steps 1. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. The total space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. To access the list of subsystems. select the *. The total of the system percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. If an * displays. press the Subsystem button. Select the system and subsystem(s) you want to make active. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. 4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 296 .

Retrieves one-line type and RCP dimensions from specifications in the database and from overrides. For additional information about propagation. Set the toggle to On to verify that an element exists in the database before you propagate it. cutting them back to leave room for fittings.Propagates straight sections and fittings. radius. Runtime Field Descriptions Propagation Style — Defines the active style of propagation. 297 . Part Verification — Enables or disables part verification. Rough . Sketch . All fittings you place manually are propagated with Eden. and extension on the one-lines and RCPs. see The Drawing Process. Propagation Setup 11.Propagates straight sections. Smooth ._ _______________ Propagation Setup This command sets the active parameters for propagating one-line elements in the design file. Sketch propagation is considerably faster than Eden propagation. Eden . regardless of the settings on this form.Sketches standard straights and fittings. Cutback . Propagation Mode — Defines the active propagation mode. page 108 .Propagates straight sections only. Set the toggle to Off to skip part verification before propagation. but lacks the detail that Eden propagation provides. using the dimensions of the cross sections and the transition. Propagation sends these dimensions to the Eden symbol.

Automatic Propagation — Enables or disables the automatic propagation of elements.February 2003 If Eden is the active propagation mode. 3. Steps 1. Select the Propagation Setup command. part verification will be performed. regardless of the status of this toggle. The Propagation Setup form displays. will cause the propagation to be deleted and redrawn to reflect the change. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. 2. Also. When the toggle is set to Off. like editing the size. 298 . that affect the graphical display of the propagation. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving any changes to the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . any changes you make to an element. elements are automatically propagated when placed. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. If you set the toggle to On. automatic propagation is disabled.

and key in a new value. You can only review the system and oneline information in these fields. and then select the desired level number displayed in the Systems/One Line list. They also allow you to turn off or on the display of some or all available levels. All Off — Turns off the display of all levels in the design. Turn Levels On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the display for the levels associated with the one-line types in your design file. Restore — Returns the display of levels in the selected view to its state prior to entering the Set Active Levels command. but can select the level numbers (in combination with the Turn Levels On/Off toggle). select the appropriate level number. the button appears to be depressed. and the levels on which they display. 299 . Set Active Levels 11. When a level has its display turned on. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. 1 . Levels — Indicate what levels display in the design. All level display settings on the form are valid for whatever view is active. select the Turn Levels On/Off toggle._ _______________ Set Active Levels This command displays the current active level(s) and allows you both to turn off any active levels and to activate new levels. or select the field. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. Runtime View — Displays the active view. Systems/One Line — Displays the available systems. select a value from the list. All On — Turns on the display of all levels in the design. To change the active view.63 indicate whether or not each available level displays in the design. their corresponding one-line types.

Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Steps 1.February 2003 Graphics — Displays the level display for title block annotation in the design file. Select the Set Active Levels command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 2. 3. The Levels form displays. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. 300 .

This information includes: segment lengths. Runtime If a fitting or an RCP that is at the termination of a run is selected. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element and select another element. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element and display that element’s information._ _______________ Display Element Information This command displays raceway element characteristics. Select the Display Element Information command. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. and coordinate location of ends and bends. Display Element Information 11. a straight section. 301 . 3. then run information is displayed. then the four key attributes associated with the fitting are displayed. or an RCP within a run is selected. Return to step 2. 2. Return to step 2. If either a one-line. Identify Raceway element Select the element you want to review. Steps 1. a fitting within a run. location and radius of each bend in the run.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 302 .

Highlight Element by Sector/Word — Highlights elements with a given sector/word position. In addition. Utilities Commands The Utilities commands highlight elements within your design file based on the identification criteria (ASID ID. Highlight Element by ASID ID — Highlights an element with a given ASID ID. 303 . Display Element Type and ASID ID — Displays the element type and ASID ID of an identified element. Highlight Element by Link — Highlights an element with given entity and mslink values. you can highlight propagation errors in the design file. Highlight Propagation Errors — Identifies existing propagation errors in a design file. Utilities Commands Toggle Construction Display On/Off — Turns the display of construction class elements on or off. Display Link — Displays the entity and mslink values of an identified element. Display Sector/Word Value — Displays the sector/word position of an identified element. Utilities Commands 12._ _______________ 12. You can also use the commands to display the identification criteria of specified elements and the system and one-line type of an identified element. sector/word position) you provide. Display System and One-Line Type — Displays the associated system and one-line type of an identified element.

304 .February 2003 Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System or Plant Coordinate System associated with the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or shows the coordinate system currently active.

Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Using the Utilities Commands Before Using These Commands 12. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. 305 . Group Workflow In general. you will use those commands that display the attribute information of an element (Display ASID ID. for example) before the commands that highlight elements based on the attribute information you specify (Highlight Element by ASID ID. page 119 . For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ Using the Utilities Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. Utilities You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. for example).

The top of the prompt area displays all views in which the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command is toggled to On. select the Update View command to see the results of the display toggle. 2. 3. Steps 1. the view number displays in a prompt. this command allows you to view all the non-displayed EE elements as well as any other construction class elements. Press <R> to exit the command. All non-displayed EE text elements are automatically placed in construction class. Therefore. 306 .February 2003 Toggle Construction Display On/Off This command turns On and Off the display for construction elements within each individual view in the design file. Once you have exited the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command from the menu. When construction display is On. Select view Place a data point in the view in which you want the annotation display toggled On or Off.

307 . but is not added to a working set. Press <Esc> to exit. The file must contain the sector/word position of the element(s) you want to highlight. Highlight Element by Sector/Word Highlight Sector/Word With Filename 12. 6 (shape). 4 (line string). If the position is valid. Key in sector and word value or file name Key in the sector and word value separated by a space. Go to Step 4. If you do not specify a pathname for the file. 3 (line). Select the Highlight Element By Sector/Word command. the entire complex element highlights. and both are relative to 1. 2. If the element is part of a complex element._ _______________ Highlight Element by Sector/Word This command highlights elements by a sector/word position that you specify. Key in another sector/word combination to continue highlighting elements by sector and word. Steps 1. 3. the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. 7 (text node). The sector/word position must be the location of an element type 2 (cell). or 17 (text). The file will display in a form on the screen. allowing you to select the sector/word value from the displayed file. Element highlighted The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. The position of the sector and word are compatible with EDG. the element highlights. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. Utilities You can specify a filename instead of the sector/word position to highlight an element. 4. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the sector and word values.

— OR — Select the Return button to cancel the file display form. select Confirm (√) to accept the sector and word value in the line. Point to view for window Identify the view where you want the element highlighted. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command.February 2003 5. 308 . Return to Step 1. 6. Press <D> to select another sector/word value from the File Display form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1. After you select a line. 7. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Identify a line that contains a sector and word value. Go to Step 6.) Go to Step 4. Select sector and word value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename.

allowing you to select the ASID ID from the displayed file. The Only the Element button highlights only the raceway element having the given ASID ID. the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. If the ASID ID you specify is valid. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command. Select the Highlight Element By Asid Id command. you can specify the file pro. The Children of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the children of the element having the given ASID ID. The Parent of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the parents of the element having the given ASID ID.err. For example. 2. but is not added to the working set. The All Elements button highlights all raceway elements associated with the element having the given ASID ID: the element itself and all of its children. The Select hilite asid mode form displays. the raceway element highlights. If you do not specify a pathname for a file._ _______________ Highlight Element by ASID ID Highlight Element by ASID ID This command highlights elements by an ASID identification (ID) that you specify. 309 . The file will display in a form on the screen. Utilities Steps 1. to see where propagation errors exist in your design file. Select the appropriate Highlight by ASID ID button. The file must contain the ASID ID of the element(s) you want to highlight. 12. Highlight ASID ID With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the ASID ID to highlight an element.

5. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Return to step 2. Key in another ASID ID to continue highlighting raceway elements. Go to step 6. Return to step 1. — OR — Key-in the filename of a file containing the ASID IDs._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select asid id from form After you enter the filename. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit the command. 310 . Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the elements highlighted. Continue highlighting the elements according to the specified Highlight by ASID ID mode.February 2003 3. 4. a file display form displays. 6. Return to step 2. Key in asid id or file name Key in the ASID ID. Element highlighted The raceway element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit.

_ _______________ Select a line that contains an ASID ID. 9. Return to step 3. Return to step 1. 311 . — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in step 3. Utilities 8. Press <D> to select another ASID ID from the file display form.) Go to step 5. Highlight Element by ASID ID After you select a line. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element(s) highlighted. select Confirm (√) to accept the ASID ID in the line. Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. Go to step 8. 7. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to step 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to modify the highlight by asid mode. 12.

6 (shape). Steps 1. the element highlights. 2. Highlight Link With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the entity and mslink combination to highlight an element. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. the entire complex element highlights. If the element is part of a complex element. 312 . 5. 3 (line). or 17 (text). Identify a line that contains the entity and mslink values. Select the Highlight Element By Link command. Select entity/mslink value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename.February 2003 Highlight Element by Link This command highlights elements by given entity (table) and mslink values that you specify. The file will display in a form on the screen. allowing you to select the mslink from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for the file. but is not added to a working set. Key in another entity/mslink combination to continue highlighting elements by mslink. the command searches for it in the <current project>/rway/tmp directory. Key in entity and mslink (###:###) or filename Key in the entity and mslink values separated by a :. 4 (line string). — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the entity and mslink values. 7 (text node). The file must contain the entity and mslink of the element(s) you want to highlight. Press <Esc> or <R> to exit. The entity and mslink values must correspond with an element type 2 (cell). If the entity and mslink are valid._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to Step 4. 3. Element highlighted The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. 4.

(When you press <D> the form redisplays._ _______________ After you select a line. Return to Step 1. 313 . Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. 7.) Go to Step 4. 6. select Confirm (√) to accept the entity and mslink values in the line. Go to Step 6. Press <D> to select more entity and mslink values from the file display form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. Return to Step 1. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Point to view for window Highlight Element by Link 12. Utilities Point to the view where you want the element highlighted.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Exit the form without highlighting any propagation errors. and the pro. and select Confirm (√). The propagation error(s) highlights in the design file. 3.February 2003 Highlight Propagation Errors This command highlights propagation errors in the design file. — OR — Select Reset or Cancel (X) to exit the command. Continue highlighting propagation errors. select the error(s) from the list. 314 . The pro. Select the Highlight Propagation Errors command.err file displays. Go to step 2. 2. To highlight a particular error(s) in the design file.err form redisplays. Review the errors listed on the form. Steps 1.

Utilities 315 . Identify element Select the element to display the sector/word for._ _______________ Display Sector/Word Value This command displays the sector and word position. 2. of an identified element. Select the Display Sector/Word command. in the MicroStation command window. The sector and word for the selected element displays in the MicroStation command window. and accept it with a <D>. 12. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Display Sector/Word Value Steps 1.

— OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. 2. Select the Display Element Type and ASID ID command. Identify element Select the element for which to display the ASID ID and accept it with <D>. in the MicroStation command window. of an identified element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Display Element Type and ASID ID This command displays the element type and the ASID identification (ID). 316 . The element type and ASID ID display in the MicroStation command window. Steps 1.

of an identified element. mslink = <value> — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. 2. Identify element Select the element you want to display the link for and accept it with <D>. in the MicroStation command window. Display Link Steps 1. 12. Utilities 317 ._ _______________ Display Link This command displays the entity (table) and mslink. The entity and mslink values display in the MicroStation command window in the following format: Entity (table number) = <value>. Select the Display Link command.

page 119. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. along with the Print System and One-Line Type form. Select the Display System and One-Line Type command from the menu. reset a command action._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 318 . Using the form.February 2003 Display System and One-Line Type This command displays the system and one-line type associated with an element you identify. The precision input form displays. For detailed information about precision input. accept input. see Precision Input Form. Steps 1. At any point during this operating sequence. The identified element highlights. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. route one-lines. and exit a command. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 2. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. — OR — Exit the command.

The system prompts you to identify another element. 4. 319 . system. The fields on the form fill with information about the element’s one-line type. Utilities — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Go to step 2. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. and subsystems (if applicable). Continue identifying elements in the design file._ _______________ 3. Go to step 2. — OR — Exit the command. Display System and One-Line Type 12. The system prompts you to identify another element.

This becomes important when attaching reference models to the active model.February 2003 Active Coordinate System This palette provides the Active Design Volume Coordinate System. the coordinate system rotates when the active coordinate system is changed. Activate Plant Coordinate System. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. If you desire to change the coordinate system. The Plant Coordinate System uses this global coordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models. Show Active Coordinate System The Show Active Coordinate System command displays the active coordinate system in the status field. Activate Design Volume Coordinate System The Activate Design Volume Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Design Volume Coordinate System. model graphics do not rotate to reflect the active coordinate system. Show Active Coordinate System — Displays the active coordinate system in the status field. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. Activate Plant Coordinate System — Activates the Plant Coordinate System (PCS). When the coordinate system is switched between the PCS and DVCS. 320 . Instead._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Commands Activate Design Volume Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) allowing you to define a local coordinate system for a particular model. you can select either the Activate Design Volume Coordinate System or Activate Plant Coordinate System commands. and Show Active Coordinate System commands. Activate Plant Coordinate System The Activate Plant Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Plant Coordinate System.

_ _______________ 13. The Database palette is activated by selecting Database from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Database Commands The Database commands are used to load and run reports from the database. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. Reports — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. 13. 321 . Database Rulecheck — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Database Commands Topics Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing.

Group Workflow You must load the database before you can run a report or rulecheck. Before Using These Commands Refer to the individual command descriptions for any requirements which may be necessary before using each command. and screen prompts vary for each command. instructions for using these commands are described in each individual command section. 322 . Operating Information Because the operating sequence. command key-ins.February 2003 Using the Database Commands When to Use These Commands Use these command to run limited database commands while still in the graphic design session._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline._ _______________ Load Database This command loads a relational database with information generated by the EE Raceway design file. Database rcp_to_drw pds_north* rcp_to_drw pds_elev* rcp_to_sys ee_percent*** drop_point ee_dist_down_ol** drop_point ee_dist_to_rcp** one_line ee_ol_length** ol_to_sys ee_percent*** 323 . This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw Column Name pds_east* Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Load Database When you run the Load Database command on a design file that has been loaded previously into the database. All RCP’s and segments must have a tag number before using this command. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. the command removes the occurrences of the previous load and completely reloads the design file. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. 13. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system.

The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. straight pds_north* straight pds_elev* str_to_sys ee_percent*** fitting pds_east* fitting pds_north* fitting pds_elev* fit_to_sys ee_percent*** * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. 324 . Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file.February 2003 straight straight ee_tl_length pds_east* The graphical length of the straight in master units. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The columns are optional for Load Database.

Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. 325 . The message file is created on every run of the process. where you may review the errors. and is displayed automatically to the screen._ _______________ Steps 1. Steps 2. select Confirm (√). Select Load database command. 13. When you are finished completing the input information. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. the message above displays. The Load database screen displays. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. Enter error and output filenames. the message above displays. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Accept will load database. When complete. or accept the displayed defaults. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. Database 3. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. and the process begins. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files.

an input screen displays. Key in any information that is not supplied by default. see Create Project for the directory structure._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat file (win32app\eerway\data). allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. You must load the project database before running any reports. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. See Reports. To change the output filename. These reports report on the project and reference databases. When you process a report.February 2003 Report This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. You can change the name of the output file or error file. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports.) 326 . All reports are kept in the /reports directory. select the output file box and key in a new name.

You should give each report you want to save a unique name. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. For instance. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. 4. 3. Select the report you want to run from the list. Report Steps 1. you should name the output files yourself. Database You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled._ _______________ If you want to save reports throughout a project. 2. 13. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. Select the Report command. the new file will overwrite that file. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. Define the report input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the report. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting 327 .

and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 direction. 328 .

_ _______________
Rule Checks

Rule Checks

This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. You must load the project database before running any rule checks.

Overview
13. Database
This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway rule checks. For more detailed information about each rule check, see Reports, page 545 . The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. When you process a rule check, an input screen displays.

The name of the rule check report displays at the top. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields, or change that information according to your specifications.

329

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 If you want to save reports throughout a project, you should name the output files yourself. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously, the new file will destroy the previously created file. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name.

Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Rule command. Select the rule check report you want to run from the listing area. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Define the input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the rule check report.

330

_ _______________
14. Raceway Processes
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of EE Raceway processes. You will run all EE Raceway processes from the Process menu found on the EE Raceway Drawing menu. (See Process in the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about running all processes.) The individual EE Raceway processes are described in the following sections:

Raceway Processes

Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. Unload Design — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the design filename you specify. Unload Sheet — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. Cleanup Database — Removes any data from a project database that is not currently associated with a design in the project’s ../rway/dgn directory. Create Interference Envelope (default name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks. Create Interference Envelope (given name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file, with the name you specify, that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks.

14. EERWAY Processes

331

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Load Database
This process loads a relational database with information generated by an EERWAY design file. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. 1. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading, using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu. Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. Load database tracks drawing information based on the "Drawing" table of the project database. Thus, you must annotate the drawing or model and enter the unique "SHEET" information, using the Lock Model and the Annotate Model commands respectively.

2.

This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_sys drop_point drop_point Column Name pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** ee_dist_down_ol** ee_dist_to_rcp** Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin, and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. The graphical length of the straight in master units. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range.

one_line ol_to_sys straight straight straight straight

ee_ol_length** ee_percent*** ee_tl_length pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev*

332

_ _______________
str_to_sys fitting fitting fitting fit_to_sys ee_percent*** pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent***

Load Database

Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system.

* The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. The columns are optional for Load Database. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway.

Steps
1. Select Load database from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Load database screen displays.

14. EERWAY Processes

2.

Enter drawing name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

333

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between Foreground, Background, and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections. When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen, where you may review the errors. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The message file is created on every run of the process, and is displayed automatically to the screen. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

334

_ _______________
Batch File Option
The load database process can be executed from a batch file. Setup an rway.bat file to export the necessary Microstation and EERWAY environment variables to execute the load database process. Include the following EERWAY environment variables: EES_REFDB — RIS Schema name for reference database EE_SCHEMA — RIS Schema name for project database EERD_MSGS — Directory path for EERWAY message files EERD_TBLS — Directory path for EERWAY database table files Example of rway.bat:

Batch File Option

SET SET SET SET SET SET

MS=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION MS_EXE=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION EES_REFDB=CERT60_REF EE_SCHEMA=CERT60_PRJ EERD_MSGS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ EERD_TBLS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\

14. EERWAY Processes

335

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Design
This process unloads a design from a relational database, based on the design filename you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Design process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database, nor will it delete information from user-defined tables.

Steps
1. Select Unload from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Design database screen displays.

2.

Enter design name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

3.

Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields.

336

_ _______________
4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Design

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

14. EERWAY Processes

337

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Sheet
This process unloads an EE Raceway drawing from a relational database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Sheet process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. The drawing you are unloading must have a title block, and the sheet name in the title block must match the database entry for that drawing, since the process keys off the sheet name in the title block. If the sheet name contains blanks, it must be specified in single quotes.

Steps
1. Select Unload Sheet from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Sheet database screen displays.

2. 3.

Key in a sheet name. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names.

338

_ _______________
The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Sheet

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review.

14. EERWAY Processes

You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

339

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Cleanup Database
This process removes information from the database that is not in any drawing currently loaded in the database. For example, information may have been added through the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to test for a special case or to create customized tables. This process also removes information on any EE Raceway drawing which has been deleted, but for some reason was not removed from the database. The Cleanup Database process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), onelines, and three-lines that are part of the project database but which are not part of any raceway design file. This process will not unload records of customized tables in the database. The process uses the filenames in the drawing table of all current drawings. It then makes a list of all valid drawings, and deletes anything from the database which is not connected to one of these drawings. This process will not delete drawings. It will delete from the database only that information which is not in any current drawing.

Steps
1. Select Cleanup Database from the Process Menu, and select Confirm (√). The Cleanup Database screen displays.

2.

Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults.

340

Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.msg file. Select the desired operating mode. EERWAY Processes You can view either file using the Output option on the Utilities screen. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The process begins. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and it includes a log of what was unloaded during processing. 4. It will display mostly zeroes. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. the message above displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.err file. The . and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. When complete. is created. Background. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 3. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. the message above displays. Confirm your selections. page 64 ). select Confirm (√). You may choose between Foreground. 14. Cleanup Database When you are finished completing the input information. 341 .

env>. Steps 1.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (default name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. Upon completion. 342 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). 3. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. the process writes the file to <current_project>. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays. 2. Enter design name. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways.

The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Select the desired operating mode. 14.err file. Otherwise. the above message displays. the above message displays. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>.msg file. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). Create Interference Envelope (default name) When you finish completing the input information. 5. Otherwise. background. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. Confirm your selections._ _______________ 4. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. EERWAY Processes 343 . lists all errors that occurred during the process. The . The process begins. select the Confirm button (√). displays all processing information. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. When complete. You may choose between foreground.prj/rway/tmp directory.prj/rway/tmp directory.

The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (given name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). Steps 1. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. 4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Enter design name. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays: 2. Key in a name for the envelope file. the process writes the file to <current_project>. 344 . 3.env>. Upon completion. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames).

an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. the above message displays. select the Confirm button (√). Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Create Interference Envelope (given name) When you finish completing the input information. Select the desired operating mode. 6. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. The . The ._ _______________ 5. lists all errors that occurred during the process.prj/rway/tmp directory.prj/rway/tmp directory. EERWAY Processes 345 . displays all processing information. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Otherwise. When complete. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. The process begins.msg file. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.err file. Confirm your selections. 14. You may choose between foreground. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. the above message displays. Otherwise. background. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes).

February 2003 346 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Compress EDEN Symbol Library — Compresses an Eden symbol library to remove unused space left by deleted symbols. List EDEN User Functions — Lists Eden user functions in a selected Eden symbol library. then edit the to specify the appropriate directory. You should also consult the appendix in this guide entitled Eden Symbol Generation . The path to the extracted symbol source file called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. The path to the symbol library called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_LIB. page 59 . see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. exporting RWAY_EDEN_LIB to specify the appropriate directory. Each Eden process is described in a separate section. You will use these processes to compile Eden symbols. and gives you the option of placing the symbol in an Eden symbol library. For information about accessing the processes. Eden Processes 347 . You will access the Eden processes from the EDEN option found on the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. If you want to place your Eden library in a different directory. as follows: Compile EDEN Symbol — Compiles an Eden symbol file. manipulate the Eden symbol library. Delete EDEN Symbol — Deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. The delivered default symbol source file path is <current_project>/rway/tmp. The delivered default symbol library path is win32app\eerway\eden. Eden Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of available Eden processes. Eden Processes For a general description of Eden symbol generation. Extract EDEN User Function From Library — Extracts a specified user function from an Eden symbol library. then edit the . Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries — Merges the contents of two Eden symbol libraries into one library. List EDEN Symbol Library — Lists Eden symbols in a selected Eden symbol library. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library — Extracts a specified symbol from an Eden symbol library. 15. see Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. If you want to place your source symbol files in a different directory._ _______________ 15. and edit the Eden symbol file.EErc file in your home directory.

February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File — Uses a standard ASCII editor to edit a specified symbol source file. 348 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

To change the displayed output filename. To change the displayed error filename. Enter symbol source file — Displays the name of the symbol source file to compile. select the field. The -l option simply lists the compiled Eden symbol file. page 513 for information about symbol file creation. The -o option lists the compiled Eden symbol file. and key in a new library name. select the field. and then adds the symbol to the specified library. Eden Processes Before Using This Command You must create an Eden symbol file. 15. and key in a new option. To enter the symbol source file. For information about the path to the symbol library. and gives you the option of placing the compiled symbol in an Eden symbol library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. To change the displayed option. and key in a filename. and key in a new filename. 349 ._ _______________ Compile EDEN Symbol This process compiles an Eden symbol file. select the field. and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Compile EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. For information about the path to the symbol source file. To change the displayed default library name. Enter option — Displays the default compile option (-o). Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. See Eden Symbol Generation.

msg file. 3. 2. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . select Confirm (√). The . the message above displays. 350 . background. the above message displays. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. For information about operating modes. Select Compile EDEN Symbol from the list.err file. The Compile EDEN Symbol form displays. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. see Output._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.February 2003 Steps 1. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . 4. and the Eden process begins. You can view either file on the screen. When you have completed the input information. contains any output from the process. Select the desired operating mode. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. see EDEN. page 89. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Confirm your selections. page 67 . You can choose between foreground. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. and batch operating modes. and select Confirm (√).

_ _______________ Delete EDEN Symbol This process deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. To enter the symbol name. To change the displayed library name. and key in a new library name. and key in a new filename. 15. and key in the name. select the field. To change the displayed error filename. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to delete from the library. To change the displayed output filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. select the field. Delete EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Eden Processes 351 . For information about the path to the symbol source file.

Select Delete EDEN Symbol from the list. The . The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. and select Confirm (√). select Confirm (√). and batch operating modes. You can choose between foreground. background.msg file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Select the desired operating mode. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. see EDEN. When you have completed the input information. the message above displays.February 2003 Steps 1.err file. the above message displays. The . page 89. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. For information about operating modes. 3. page 67 . lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The Delete EDEN Symbol form displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Confirm your selections. You can view either file on the screen. contains any output from the process. 2. The . 352 . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 4. see Output. and the Eden process begins. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.

and key in a new library name. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a new filename. select the field. select the field. Eden Processes 353 . select the field. To change the displayed output filename. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed error filename._ _______________ List EDEN Symbol Library This process lists the Eden symbols in the selected Eden library. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. List EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed library name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. 15.

The . background. When you have completed the input information. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. For information about operating modes. Select the desired operating mode. 4. see EDEN.msg file.February 2003 Steps 1. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. the message above displays. The List EDEN Symbol Library form displays. 2. 354 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and batch operating modes. and the Eden process begins. You can choose between foreground. page 89. the above message displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .err file.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and select Confirm (√). select Confirm (√). 3. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. You can view either file on the screen. The . contains any output from the process. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Confirm your selections. page 67 . see Output.

List EDEN User Functions Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. For information about operating modes. and key in a new filename. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. The List EDEN User Functions form displays. Eden Processes Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. To change the displayed output filename. background. page 67 . select the field. To change the displayed error filename. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. and key in a new library name. and key in a new filename._ _______________ List EDEN User Functions This process lists the Eden user functions in the selected Eden library. select the field. Steps 1. 355 . For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed library name. 2. select the field. 3. and select Confirm (√). see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. 15. You can choose between foreground. see EDEN. and batch operating modes.

Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the message above displays. the above message displays. 356 .msg file. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. When you have completed the input information. page 89. The . Confirm your selections.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and the list will display. contains any output from the process. The . see Output.err file.February 2003 4. The . You can view either file on the screen. select Confirm (√).

For information about the path to the symbol library. To enter a library name. and key in a new filename. and key in a name. 15. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent._ _______________ Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries This process merges two Eden symbol libraries into one. Eden Processes Steps 1. To change the displayed error filename. 2. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. For information about the path to the symbol library. and select Confirm (√). 357 . Merge from library name — Displays the name of the symbol library whose contents you will merge with first library. Select Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries from the list. The Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries form displays. Merge into library name — Displays the name of the symbol library into which you will merge the contents of a second library. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. To enter a library name. and key in a name. select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. To change the displayed output filename. select the field.

background. select Confirm (√). When you have completed the input information. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.err file. 358 . and the Eden process begins. The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. see Output. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.February 2003 3. You can view either file on the screen. You can choose between foreground._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The . 4. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. page 89. The . Confirm your selections.msg file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. see EDEN. the above message displays. For information about operating modes. contains any output from the process. Select the desired operating mode. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and batch operating modes. the message above displays. page 67 .

select the field. select the field. Select the desired operating mode. You can choose between foreground. To change the displayed library name. page 67 . see the description at the beginning of this chapter. 3. The Compress EDEN Symbol Library form displays. 15. Compressing the library removes the unused space left by deleted symbols. and batch operating modes. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name._ _______________ Compress EDEN Symbol Library This process compresses the selected Eden symbol library. To change the displayed error filename. Steps 1. and key in a new filename. background. 359 . and select Confirm (√). To change the displayed output filename. see EDEN. Eden Processes 2. For information about operating modes. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a new filename. Compress EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. and key in the name of the library you intend to compress. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Select Compress EDEN Symbol Library from the list.

page 89. The . contains any output from the process. the message above displays. You can view either file on the screen. The . lists all the errors that occurred during processing.err file. see Output. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. select Confirm (√). an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.msg file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and the Eden process begins. the above message displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 360 . When you have completed the input information. Confirm your selections.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.February 2003 4. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.

select the field. for example). see the description at the beginning of this chapter. then edit the . 15. The extracted symbol is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. select the field. To enter the symbol name. For information about the path to the symbol library. The delivered default source symbol path is win32app\eerway\eden. If you want to store your source symbol files in another directory. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to extract from the library. select the field. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. The symbol is not deleted from the library when you extract it. To change the displayed error filename. select the field.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. and key in a new filename. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed output filename. and key in the name. The path to the extracted symbol source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC._ _______________ Extract EDEN Symbol From Library This process extracts a symbol from the selected library. To change the displayed library name. Eden Processes 361 . Extract EDEN Symbol From Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new library name.

Select Extract EDEN Symbol From Library from the list. page 89. 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 2. and the Eden process begins. see EDEN. contains any output from the process.err file. The . the message above displays. The . the above message displays. Select the desired operating mode. You can view either file on the screen. The . Confirm your selections. 4. and batch operating modes. and select Confirm (√). The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 362 . lists all the errors that occurred during processing. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground. page 67 . When you have completed the input information. For information about operating modes.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. select Confirm (√).February 2003 Steps 1.msg file. see Output. background. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. The Extract EDEN Symbol From Library form displays.

The extracted user function is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. and key in the name._ _______________ Extract EDEN User Function From Library Extract EDEN User Function From Library This process extracts a user function from the selected library.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. select the field. and key in a new filename. select the field. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new filename. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. If you want to store your source user function files in another directory. then edit the . Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the user function you intend to extract from the library. Eden Processes 363 . To change the displayed error filename. select the field. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. The delivered default source user function path is win32app\eerway\eden. and key in a new library name. To enter the user function name. The user function is not deleted from the library when you extract it. To change the displayed library name. for example). Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed output filename. 15. For information about the path to the symbol library. The path to the extracted user function source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field.

3. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications.err file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . page 67 . see EDEN. 4. and batch operating modes. background.February 2003 Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 364 . lists all the errors that occurred during processing. You can choose between foreground. Select Extract EDEN User Function From Library from the list. When you have completed the input information. Select the desired operating mode.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and select Confirm (√). Confirm your selections. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. and the Eden process begins. The Extract EDEN User Function From Library form displays. select Confirm (√). The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. the message above displays. 2. For information about operating modes.

_ _______________
Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

Extract EDEN User Function From Library

15. Eden Processes

365

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Edit EDEN Symbol File
This process allows you to edit a symbol source file using a standard ASCII editor. It is only available on a graphics terminal.

Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed error filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Enter editor — Displays the name of the default ASCII editor (vi) that you will use to edit the Eden symbol file. To change the displayed editor, select the field, and key in a new standard ASCII editor name. Enter symbol file name — Displays the name of the symbol file you intend to edit. To enter a symbol filename, select the field, and key in a symbol file name. For information about the path to the symbol source file, see the description at the beginning of this chapter.

366

_ _______________
Steps
1. Select Edit EDEN Symbol File from the list, and select Confirm (√). The Edit EDEN Symbol File form displays: 2. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes. For information about operating modes, see EDEN, page 67 . 4. Confirm your selections. When you have completed the input information, select Confirm (√), and the Eden process begins.

Steps

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

15. Eden Processes

367

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

368

_ _______________
16. Integrated Commands
The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules, providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes, review the PDS clashes in a model, create a window containing a specific element, and display information about the reference models attached to the current model. The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS, not when running standalone EE Raceway.

Integrated Commands

The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar, then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu.

16. Integrated Commands

369

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Using the Integrated Commands
When to Use These Commands
Once you have performed the necessary setups, you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Before Using These Commands
Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection, and must have an existing clash in the design area.

Group Workflow
There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group.

Operating Information
See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.

370

_ _______________
16.1 Review PDS Attributes
The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected component. Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. To view pipe centerlines (to review the line segments), you need to display construction type elements. Use the MicroStation Settings > View Attributes > Turn on construction command.

Review PDS Attributes

Parameters
Attribute Name – Lists the item’s attributes. Value – Displays the item’s attribute value that is defined in the database. Close – Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box.

16. Integrated Commands

371

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.2

Reference PDS Model
The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project.

Parameters
Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Select the discipline which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Select the design area which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Attach – Attaches a reference model. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach.

372

_ _______________
Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command.

Reference PDS Model

16. Integrated Commands

373

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.3

Window to Named PDS Item
The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute you identify. You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS reference files.

Options
Active Model / Reference Files – Specifies whether to look for the item in the active model or in the attached reference files. Discipline – Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. You can select: Piping, Equipment, PE HVAC, or Raceway. Depending on which discipline you select, the item attributes you can search for changes. — Piping Attributes – Line Number Label, Line ID, Inspection Iso ID, Piping Component Number, Pipe Tag, Instrument Component Number, or Pipe Support Number — Equipment Attributes – Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle Number — PE HVAC Attributes – System ID or Item ID — Raceway Attributes – RCP Tag, One Line Tag, Drop Point Tag, or Equipment ID Item Name – Specify the attribute value to search for. Restore View of Model – Restores the view setting.

374

_ _______________
16.4 Review PDS Clash
The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves existing clashes.

Review PDS Clash

Parameters
Project Name – Displays the active project name. Design Area – Displays the active design area name. Clash Type – Displays the clash type. Date – Displays the date and time the clashes were detected. Unapprove Clash – Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved. Approve Real Clash – Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control Database. Approve False Clash – Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control Database. Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash – Specifies if you want to review approved or unapproved clashes. Clash Marker – Displays the number of the current clash. Select a marker number with the left and right arrows; or, select the field and key in a marker number.

16. Integrated Commands

375

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Item A – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Item B – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Comments – Displays existing comments about the active clash. You can also select the field and type in any additional information. Highlight Clash – Highlights the clash in the selected view. Select View – Zooms in and updates the selected view. Click Select View then select the view you want to update.

376

_ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Appendix A Error Messages A: Error Messages This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. Asid <numeric value>. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. 377 .

part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load.February 2003 Asid <numeric value>. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Change element annotation. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Asid <numeric value>. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. Asid <numeric value>. 378 . <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Change element annotation.

Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. when highlighting by sector and word. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: None. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. 379 . Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. straight connected to invalid system! A: Error Messages Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. Asid:<numeric value> <string> Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message.

Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. call Intergraph support.February 2003 Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. Recovery: Key in another cell name. Invalid sys on oneline. Cannot Place Cross Section. call Intergraph support. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. and replace the one-line. Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Recovery: The program will restore the original text. or ". Recovery: Key-in in only characters. If the problem persists. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . digits. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. Cannot Place Cross Section. and replace the one-line. Invalid olt on oneline. 380 . If the problem persists. "$".". Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active.

ins is not in the proper location. Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. A: Error Messages Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 127. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Color not in range 0 to 127 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. 381 . Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file. Recovery: None. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them.

Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. 382 . Please export this variable. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP.February 2003 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Could not get one line type part table from user data. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Could not get one line type from user data.

Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. A: Error Messages Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: None. 383 . Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. based on cause of error. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: None. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: There are various recoveries.

Could not write to TCB. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. insert it into the reference database. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 384 . Recovery: Key in a new key value. Recovery: Enter correct filename. status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. If the key does not exist. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file. The database is case-dependent. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a one-line.February 2003 Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. Recovery: Make sure the key is correct.

Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. change the spec. Recovery: Enter design filename. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. 385 . Recovery: Enter correct directory name._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. A: Error Messages Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Recovery: None.

Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal.February 2003 Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. 386 . Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>.

Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data.err did not close properly. Recovery: Exit the command and retry. A: Error Messages Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid. Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Error closing propagation log file.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. Recovery: Make sure the pro. Recovery: Enter a new value. Reason: File pro. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file. 387 . Propagation status may not be recorded. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Change access to design file. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file.

February 2003 Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Error getting values from reference for table <string>! Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Recovery: Add privilege to database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 388 . Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Recovery: Add entries to reference database.

Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database.EErc file. Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your . Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. A: Error Messages Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. 389 . Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error in graphic bang placement. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. Recovery: Correct entry. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library.

Error loading one-lines! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database.February 2003 Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. 390 .

and one element. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. 391 . Error No Placepoints or No Elements. Error opening design file <string>. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Recovery: Change annotation of element._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. A: Error Messages Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. one datum point. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. Recovery: Add privilege to the database.

Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission.February 2003 Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. 392 .sql file. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref.

A: Error Messages Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. 393 ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref.sql file. Recovery: Add privileges to database. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list. Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list.

Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Recovery: Add privilege. Recovery: Edit the sheet name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name.February 2003 Error saving symbology . Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. 394 .

395 . Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. Recovery: None. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). A: Error Messages Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Reason: Internal error. The process creates a zero-length envelope. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. Recovery: Fix other errors. Recovery: Key in a value. Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Recovery: Add privilege to database.

Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. extension or transition of the fitting. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Reason: An illegal angle exists. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. change the spec._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 396 . For example. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Recovery: Modify the radius. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. at a cross. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other.February 2003 File <string> exists.

397 ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. Possible memory allocation problem. a form could not be displayed by the software. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. A: Error Messages Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Fatal error. Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. Try to exit and re-enter the software.

Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767.February 2003 Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. 398 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted./config/assign file. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager.

For example. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Invalid Eden Processor Input._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. <numeric value>. A: Error Messages Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. 399 . Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol.

If it is a cable entry. Invalid key in . Recovery: Select another graphic group number._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. Recovery: Key in another value. click on the REMOVE button to delete. For example. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0.February 2003 Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. Recovery: Enter an integer value. 400 . Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. quantity must be an integer greater than 0. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value.

Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. 401 . vertex <numeric value>. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Enter a valid response. Invalid real number: <string> Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Invalid RCP .

Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. 402 . Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation.February 2003 Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element.

RT. Recovery: Delete all but one title block. or RB. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. Must be LT. 403 . Reason: Invalid text justification entered. and place the element or RCP. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. LC.. CB. CT. LB.or RB in the justification field. A: Error Messages Max run angle = <numeric value>._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. LC. . Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. RC. CC. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. Recovery: Enter LT. Recovery: Fix other problems..

Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. 404 .February 2003 Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file.cel). Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Recovery: Key in another name. or C in the active specification. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. C for the cross section type. 405 . A: Error Messages No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. B. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. Reason: The cross section must be of type A. B. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again.

Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Populate the database. 406 . Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Populate the database with parts.February 2003 No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type.

407 . Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Populate the database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. Recovery: Populate the database. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. A: Error Messages No valid special parts exist for this table Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file.

Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. Recovery: None. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Recovery: Select another option. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. 408 .February 2003 Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Recovery: Call Intergraph support._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly.

409 . The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". no rows found fitting the given criteria Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Select failed. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. Recovery: Enter schema name. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. A: Error Messages Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. title block. Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. three-line._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. RCP). Recovery: Specify new find criteria.

Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Recovery: Enter sheet name. 410 . Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Recovery: Change sheet name. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Recovery: Identify a valid text element. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table.unl file or inserting a row through SQL. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7.

Recovery: Place a manual fitting. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. cannot be edited. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero. A: Error Messages Title block placed ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. snap to the angle. Recovery: None. therefore. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. 411 .Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and.

Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the ./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table.February 2003 Warning Column <string> found in reference. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the . Recovery: Change the title block annotation. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form. Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. 412 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database. Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: If necessary.

413 . Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. you must key in a group name. Recovery: Key in the desired group name._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. A: Error Messages Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation.

February 2003 414 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File describes the file that maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. Appendix D: Specification describes vendor specifications and how to prepare them. Also included in this appendix are two descriptions and printouts related to customizing the alias.cmd file and customizing menus.cmd file as it is delivered. You will need this appendix to locate files that you want to modify.cmds file. Appendix H: alias. reports._ _______________ Appendix B: System/Application Manager Information Appendix B System/Application Manager Information This appendix and the following appendices outline the responsibilities for the EE Raceway system or application manager. It identifies the files that can be modified and describes some important files. 415 . You can modify or disable this function through the file. Appendix F: EE File Structure contains the file structure for both EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. This file is run automatically when you enter EE Raceway. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files explains how to modify the files that list the processes.cmds contains the rway. Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation describes generation of Eden symbols and provides a sample symbol processor file. B: System/App Mgmt. The key-in names for commands can be modified by editing these files. rule checks. Important new procedures related to RIS and the databases are described in this section. Appendix I: rway. Included in these appendices are important references and procedures needed to prepare and customize the EE Raceway product: Appendix C: EE Databases describes the EE databases and contains schema descriptions for both the reference and project databases. Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager contains a detailed description of the RIS Schema Manager utility. It attaches the panel menu.cmd file contains the alias. Appendix J: Reports contains detailed descriptions of the standard and rule checks reports delivered with the product. and printers in the EE Raceway Environment.

Appendix N: EE Configure describes the EE environment variables and how to configure them.February 2003 Appendix M: EE Manager contains a description of the EE Manager utility and its Edit Database process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 416 .

Add the <one-line_type>_spec and <one-line_type>_part tables to the reference database. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. ee_out_ht_diam real not null._ _______________ Appendix B: Customizing Customizing Some simple customization is described in the appendices entitled Customizing.unl files and database tables. alias. set the variable EE_PIFORM in the .EErc file (win32app\eenuc) to a different form name. 417 . To change the form design. For detailed information about editing your . ee_dimension_1 real. and rway. Form Name piform* piform_tal1 piform_tal2 piform_thn1 piform_thn2 Description default tall/thin (design 1) tall/thin (design 2) long/thin (design 1) long/thin (design 2) * The chapter entitled Precision Input Form contains a detailed illustration of the default form design (piform).cmds (all involve modifying existing text files using an editor). ee_extension real. Such customization includes writing processes and user commands using the MicroStation software. Adding a One-Line Type This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a new one-line type to the reference database. Precision Input Form B: System/App Mgmt.cmd. More extensive customization is possible for advanced users. Refer to the MicroStation Applications Programmer’s Guide for this latter procedure. as in the following example: create table trench_spec ( vendor integer not null. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. ee_units integer not null. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. ee_dimension_2 real. 1. ee_out_width real. The available precision input forms (described below) reside in win32app\eerway\sym.

You can add the necessary rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . grant all on trench_spec to public. create unique index i_fseekey on trench_spec(ee_spec_key). real. create index i_fswidth on trench_spec(ee_out_width).February 2003 ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key description real. create table trench_part ( ee_tl_type integer. 2. ee_description char(40) ).unl file. ee_part_key char(28) not null. ee_angle real. ee_weight real. For sample files. char(20). or you can add the data to your vendor.unl file which contain the required default values for the one-line type.unl files that are delivered with EE Raceway. ee_tl_subtype integer. 418 . ee_tl_qual integer. grant all on trench_part to public. real. char(28) not null. create index i_fsvendor on trench_spec(vendor). ee_spec_key char(28). refer to the tray_spec and tray_part . ee_symbol char(6). All delivered . ee_spec2_key char(28). create index i_fsheight on trench_spec(ee_out_ht_diam). 3. char(6). create index i_fpskey on trench_part(ee_spec_key). Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database.unl file and a <oneline_type>_part. ee_part char(20). Create a <one-line_type>_spec. create unique index i_fpeekey on fit_part(ee_part_key). char(40) ).unl files reside in win32app\eerway\db.

1.unl files to the rwayref. 9. For information about codelists. Add records to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables.unl file. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow.unl file. For detailed information about editing your . Add the special fitting table to the reference database. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new one-line type to the database. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. in a format like the following: FILE "tray_part. as in the following example: create table transit ( vendor integer not null. Customizing 5. B: System/App Mgmt._ _______________ Appendix B: 4. 6.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscatalog table or by inserting records in the mscatref. Add records to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. 8.cmd file.unl files and database tables. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscolumns table or by inserting records in the mscolref. 7. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the ol_type table or by inserting records in the olt.unl file and the <oneline_type>_part. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. Adding a Special Fitting This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a special fitting to the reference database.unl" DELIMITER "|". Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table in the reference database for any columns that are codelisted for the one-line type. Add the newly-created <one-line_type>_spec.unl file. INSERT INTO tray_part. Add the new one-line type to the ol_type table. 419 .

420 .unl" DELIMITER "|". Add the newly-created <special fitting>. 4. char(28) not null. char(40) ). 3. create unique index i_tsiteekey on transit(ee_part_key)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or you can insert records in the vendor. real not null. create index i_tsitheight on transit(ee_out_ht_diam).unl file.unl file that is delivered with EE Raceway. grant all on transit to public. 7. create index i_tsitvendor on transit(vendor). char(20). INSERT INTO pullbox.unl file to the rwayref. Add the new special fitting to the three-line type codelist table.unl that contains the required default values for your fitting. real. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. Create a <special fitting>. You can add rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. see the appendix entitled Eden Symbol Generation. You can add the entry directly to the tl_type table in the database.February 2003 ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part ee_symbol ee_part_key ee_description integer not null.unl file.cmd file. For a sample special fitting . refer to the pullbox. in a format like the following: FILE "pullbox. 6. or you add the data to your tlt. real. Create any new Eden symbols needed to graphically display the new special fitting. Add a row to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. 2. create index i_tsitdepth on transit(ee_dimension_1). 5. create index i_tsitwidth on transit(ee_out_width). char(20). real. char(6). For basic information about creating Eden symbols.unl file.

You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. In these files. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new special fitting to the database. Add the new special fitting entry to the manual part table. the hard-coded error message name is to the left of each = (equal sign). or by inserting a record in the mscatref. 8.msg files in both win32app\eerway\msg and win32app\eenuc\msg. Use a standard text editor to modify the error. 421 . see the appendix entitled EE Databases. which you can modify. For information about codelists._ _______________ Appendix B: You can accomplish this either by adding a row directly to the mscatalog table. To the right of each = is the message itself.unl file. Error Messages Error messages for the delivered commands are located in the error. 10.unl file. or by inserting a record in the mscolref.unl file.unl file. B: System/App Mgmt. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the mscolumns table in the database.msg files. or by inserting a record in the manprt. Reports may also be created using the native RDBMS report writing product. Customizing Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table (in the reference database) for any columns that are codelisted for the special fitting. 9. Reports You can create or modify standard and rule check reports. 11. Delivered reports are created using the RISRPT product and are compatible with the DB Access (DBA) product. The report template library is delivered in the win32app\eerway\report directory. You can accomplish this either by adding a row to the manual_part table in the database. Add a row to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. You cannot change this name.

This directory is also the location of user command index (.ndx) files. Directory for the database table files Directory path to the EE Raceway forms.February 2003 EE Environment Variables This section lists and describes the environment variables that are delivered when you download EE Raceway. the file MicroStation uses to save data about the attached menu. These environment variables can be modified using the Start > Programs > EENUC > EE Configure command. Defines the path to the on-line Help files. or "am=n. 422 . The following environment variable is defined in the win32app\eerway\bin\c400 or c100/rmonshell file: MS_CACH Sets the memory to be allocated for a design file editing session.sb1"). Sets the directory for temporary files.sb" (i. Used as a pointer to application programs. EE Nucleus. Sets the directory where application-/user-defined menus are to found when activated from an "am=n. Sets the directory that holds the menu file mgds.e. Directory path to the EE Raceway symbols. Sets the directory where application executable files are found when activated from a user command TSK statement._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . "am=n. MS_DATA MS_TMP MS_HELPFILE MS_HELPPATH The MicroStation\Program\MicroStation\config\msconfig. Directory for the message files. File containing EE Raceway symbols. For EE Raceway: EERD_COMPRESS EERD_MSGS EERD_TBLS RWAY_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE Compresses the file when you exit a design session. "am=ustn. This variable will override the user preferences setting.h1".cfg file: For MicroStation: MS_CELL MS_APP MS_EXE MS_APPMEN Sets the directory that holds the cell libraries. The following environment variables are defined in the win32app\eerway\ee.cfg file contains detailed descriptions of the MicroStation and Umenu environment variables.men. Sets the directory for the on-line Help files. and EE Raceway-specific variables.cs". They include Microstation.

it must be set to "A". Directory path and filename of command window resource file. Reference Database cmd file. Directory path for seed files. The following are the environment variables defined using the EE Configure command. Default nodename for archive/restore. Directory path for data files. Directory path for data files. Filename for the Eden symbol library._ _______________ Appendix B: The following are the environment variables that are recognized by the EE Nucleus product. Directory path for EE Nucleus product. Directory path for the RIS product. User-defined project database sql file. Schema name for project database. MS_DIR RIS_DIR EE_NUC* ENV_MSGS EENUC_DAT Directory path for the MicroStation product. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Directory path for message files. Default remote path for archive/restore. Directory path for the Eden symbol library. Directory path and project database name. User-defined reference database sql file. User-defined reference database cmd file. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value.EErc file. Project Database cmd file. MS_USERPREF MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_SYSFONTS EE_TERM ORACLE_SID Directory path and filename of user preference file. B: System/App Mgmt. delivered with the EE Nucleus product. 423 . The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\. Project Database sql file. User-defined project database cmd file. Font used by MicroStation for window and menu display. EE_CURPRJ* EE_DBS* EE_NODENAME EE_REMDIR EE_SCHEMA EE_USERNAME SYS_PASSW_FILE EE_CUSTOM_SQL EE_CUSTOM_CMD EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD EE Environment Variables Directory path for current EE project. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\EE file. Directory path and filename of password file to enter system manager page. A variable used for ORACLE databases. For EE Raceway: EE_RWAY* EERWAY_DAT EERWAY_SEED RWAY_CMD RWAY_SQL RWAYREF_CMD RWAYREF_SQL EDEN_LIB RWAY_EDEN_LIB EE_PIFORM Directory path for the EE Raceway product. Reference Database sql file. Defines the "tty" type you are running on. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. Name of the precision input form that displays during the design session. Default username for archive/restore.

Directory path for ORACLE executables.February 2003 DBA_SUPPORT EES_REFDB EES_REFSER EE_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE EE_SYM_PATH For ORACLE databases: ORACLE_HOME For INGRES databases: II_SYSTEM For INFORMIX databases: INFORMIXDIR Directory path for INFORMIX executables. Schema name for reference database. Directory path for EE symbol file. Directory path for EE forms. Data files for DB Access Support. Filename of EE symbol file. EE reference database server process. 424 . Directory path for INGRES executables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

they are based on the relational data model in which a relation is a two-dimensional table comprised of rows and columns. the reference database replaces the concept of shared part entity files and active entity files. Processes needed in the procedures above. Oracle._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Databases Appendix C EE Databases All EE databases you create will be relational databases. Most relational databases use Standard Query Language (SQL). The Electrical Engineer product line is supported by two relational databases: a project database and a reference database. and Ingres.) One reference database can be accessed by multiple project databases. A project is an associated collection of drawings and their database. such as symbol and part information. Procedures that must be followed by existing users of the EE product. RIS isolates the differences in specific vendors’ Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS). you are not forced to re-enter common information for each project. a generic relational database interface. This section contains: Descriptions of the EE databases and the Intergraph software. The project database contains information applicable to a particular project. On-line Informix. that supports it. The reference database is identified when you enter a project. RIS. Procedures that must be followed by new users of the EE product. The reference database contains information applicable to multiple projects. Thus. The EE products attach to their relational databases through Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS). (For those familiar with EDES. that is. Schema descriptions for the EE project database and the EE reference database. C: EE Databases 425 . You can report and query from the reference database as well as the project database. allowing generic network access to all EE databases generated with the following RDBMS’s: Standard Engine (SE) Informix.

The RIS schema identifies a unique database/user combination in a given commercial database system. you can update schemas without knowing either the differences between RDBMS’s or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for more information on the RIS Schema Manager product. Different RDBMS’s establish users in different ways. to attach to an SQL-type database. Through the use the RIS risschema_mgr product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . in fact. the very concept of a database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another. which you define.) 426 .February 2003 Relational Interface System (RIS) All EE products use a RIS schema.

you need to populate that database with EE tables and default information. The risschema file is an ASCII file that contains the names. Once you have created a schema on your empty database. and locations of all RIS schemas and databases._ _______________ Appendix C: Database and RIS Procedures Database and RIS Procedures You must adhere to the procedures that follow before using EE with a relational database. The process resides locally on your machine and recognizes any RIS schema on any database. — You can locate the risschema file from another workstation using the risschema_mgr process and access any schemas created on that machine. but it can exist anywhere as long as the parameters file (win32app\ingr\share\RISversion\parms) points to it. that was created using RIS Schema Manager. C: EE Databases 427 . For New Users You must first create an empty database and a user name through your chosen RDBMS. You can manage the risschema file in any of the following ways: — You can create and maintain your own risschema file.) This process will create the risschema definition file. After you have created an empty database. or see INFORMIX documentation for other creation methods. local or remote. INFORMIX users will now have to create all databases in ANSI mode. The risschema_mgr process updates and maintains the file. You can usually locate this file in the RIS product directory. use the Update Schema option under Database Utilities (see Database Utilities. Access RIS Schema Manager through the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment. Check the documentation delivered with the product for information on infxcreate. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Definition File. To do so. using the risschema_mgr process. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for detailed information on using the RIS Schema Manager product. page 50). For more information about the risschema file. ownerships. you must use the RIS Schema Manager product to create a schema. You should consult the individual RDBMS documentation on installation procedures.

sql) file which contains the table and column structure. 428 . the process loads it only if the table is empty. Where a table lacks a unique index.unl files that are listed in the .February 2003 Update Schema (create_db) Process You can use this program to do the following: Update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information. This is the command line syntax for the Update schema process: win32app\eenuc\bin\create_db [-v] [-q . you can also include: — a command (._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — modify existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the . If Update schema is used with a .unl file(s) which contain default information.sql file. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition keeping column data where column names match.unl files to load into which tables.sql file -c .sql file. — OR — Modify an existing RIS schema’s tables to conform to the structure of a given .cmd file] schema name -v -q .sql file.sql file that has a different structure than the original . You should run the Update schema process from the EE Environment Project Menu.sql file] [-c . — AND — — the corresponding . To run it outside of the EE Environment. — load those tables having a unique index with data from the .cmd file displays SQL commands as they are executed schema definition file command file to load schema To create a new schema. the process will: — add new tables listed in the .cmd) file that defines which .sql file. and then key in the command line syntax for the process. If you want to load a schema with default information. you must have at least: — an SQL (. you must first export the variable ENV_MSGS to win32app\ingr\eenuc\msg.cmd files.

with EE Raceway tables and default reference information. created through the risschema_mgr process on an existing schema. You can use this process to execute ANY valid RIS-supported SQL statement upon an existing schema. C: EE Databases 429 .sql -c \win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref._ _______________ Appendix C: Update Schema (create_db) Process Example: $ create_db -q win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref. Simply place it in a file and call that filename with the -q option.cmd sample_ref This will populate an empty sample_ref schema.

RCPs. Selecting the active one-line type parameters during a design session. Reporting. But if the project schema is custom-built. it uses the DEFAULT key attributes. tray_spec. and tray_part tables. For example. one-lines. the reference schema tables contains two additional columns: key_column and key_description. and equipment pointers. Each table must contain at least a subset of the column/attribute structure as its corresponding table in the project schema. raceway connect points (RCPs). RCP. When editing/reviewing annotation for EE Raceway elements (title blocks. the reference schema needs to be custom-built only if you want defaults for any new column to exist in the reference schema. the project schema must be custom-built accordingly. The DEFAULT key is used with the seed design file using English measurements. Some of the columns in the reference schema tables are required and cannot be modified or deleted. Each of the tables is delivered with one entry called DEFAULT. 430 . If the system cannot find a key for some reason. The actual column names are defined by the values of the key_columns and key_description in the mscatalog entry for the given table. 3. You will identify these keys through the Active OneLine Type Parameters form. Default Attributes Some tables exist in the reference schema to support default attributes. for example. the drawing. drop points. All specification information is carried in the reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . one-line. The one-line table is delivered with both the DEFAULT and METRIC DEFAULT keys. if the reference schema is custom-built. fittings. while the METRIC DEFAULT is used with the seed design file using Metric measurements. including. You will access the reference database during the following procedures: 1. Keys In addition to the default attribute columns.February 2003 Reference Schema . 2. The key_column field is a unique index used to identify a particular row of default attributes in the reference schema. You can establish default attributes for drawings.General Description The Electrical Engineer reference database is a multi-table relational database containing default attribute information and specification information. and so forth) during a design session. straights. one-lines. Each of these keys will be the default key for all one-lines of a given one-line type unless you override the key during annotation for an individual one-line. Raceway One-Line Keys A key is stored for each one-line type within a drawing.

Drop Point Keys You will identify the key for drop points through the Raceway Defaults form._ _______________ Appendix C: Reference Schema . The key you specify will serve as the default key for all equipment pointers unless you override the key during annotation for an individual equipment pointer.General Description Raceway Connect Point Keys You will identify the key for RCPs through the Raceway Defaults form. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all drop points unless you override the key during annotation for an individual drop point. Text annotation overrides any default values. Text annotation overrides any default values. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all RCPs unless you override the key during annotation for an individual RCP. Equipment Pointer Keys You will identify the key for equipment pointers through the Raceway Defaults form. C: EE Databases 431 . Text annotation overrides any default values.

For example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .approved 11 . You can add new approval status rows to this table. the codelist table ol_type in the reference database will contain all possible values that can be loaded into the column ol_type in the straight.approved 9 . Only values in the reference database codelist tables are loaded into the project database. and one_line tables in the project database. fitting.not approved 432 .approved 4 . During loads of the project database. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION approval status index number approval status description The approval status rows delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 index_value 1 . but you must not remove any of the existing rows. the reference database codelists are matched to the annotated values.February 2003 Codelists Codelists are tables in the reference database which contain all available values for a particular column of a table in the project database.approved 5 . The system issues you a warning if an annotated value does not match a value in the codelist.approved 10 .blank 2 .approved 7 . Approval Status Codelist Table The approv_status codelist table defines the available approval status values. You must be familiar with the codelist tables that follow.approved 8 .approved 6 .approved 3 .

which is an integer value that the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The table contains the index_column column. but you must not remove the existing row. The table also contains the ee_part_table column which itself contains the mscatalog number of the table holding the part information. The ee_rcp_ol_type column contains the index_column value for the one-line type to which the RCP is assigned._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Cardinal Codelist Table The cardinal codelist table defines the available cardinal point routing justification locations. You must not add or remove to this table. COLUMN_NAME code unknown TYPE Char(20) unknown DESCRIPTION drawing type unknown The drawing type delivered with EE Raceway is: code RACEWAY Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table The manual_part codelist table defines the manually-placed special fittings available with the product. 433 . COLUMN_NAME ee_car_num ee_cardinal TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION cardinal index number cardinal description The cardinal point values delivered with EE Raceway are: ee_car_num 0 1 2 6 7 8 12 13 14 ee_cardinal TOP LEFT CENTER LEFT BOTTOM LEFT TOP CENTER CENTER CENTER BOTTOM CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT C: EE Databases Drawing Type Codelist Table The drawing_type codelist table defines the available drawing types. You can add new drawing types to this table.

ee_ol. The table contains the index_column column.February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_part_table ee_rcp_ol_type ee_manpart_type TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer DESCRIPTION manual_part index number manual_part description special fitting parts table number one-line type index column number manual part type index number The special manual fittings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 index_value conduit body pullbox light fixture ee_part_table 246 249 250 ee_rcp_ol_type 3 3 3 ee_manpart_type 0 0 1 One-Line Type Codelist Table The ol_type table defines the one-line types that are available in a raceway project. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_spec_table ee_part_table ee_ol_table ee_rcp_part_table ee_max_run_angle ee_priority_level TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer integer integer integer DESCRIPTION one-line type index number one-line type description specification table mscatalog number spec parts table mscatalog number one-line table mscatalog number special fitting parts table number maximum bends allowed per run one-line type nest level The one-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: indx_col 1 2 3 4 5 index_value TRAY WIREWAY CONDUIT AIRWAY DUCTBANK ee_spec 240 242 244 247 260 ee_part 241 243 245 248 0 ee_ol 204 204 204 204 204 rcp_part 0 0 246 0 0 run_angle 0 0 360 0 0 priority 5 5 10 10 7 434 . The ee_priority_level column defines the routing priority for each one-line type. The table also contains the ee_spec._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_part. and ee_rcp_part tables which define the tables containing specification information for each one-line type.

You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values. You must not add or remove rows from this table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a system name. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The system table contains the system_num column. You can add. The rcp_type table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME system_num system_name TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION system index number system name 435 ._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists RCP Type Codelist Table This table defines how the EE Raceway software uses RCPs (Raceway Connect Points). COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION rcp type index number rcp type description The RCP types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value <blank> ROUTE description general raceway connect point raceway connect point and route point System Codelist Table C: EE Databases The ee_system table must be loaded in the reference database before you can create any raceway design files. remove. or update any of the systems delivered with EE Raceway.

You can modify the index_value values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . nor should you modify the index_column values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line type index number three-line type description The three-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 11 12 14 index_value STRAIGHT ELBOW WYE CROSS PULLBOX CONDUIT BODY DROPOUT 436 . The table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove rows from the table.February 2003 The systems delivered with EE Raceway are: system_num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 system_name Control Communication High Voltage Low Voltage Alarm Instrumentation Signal Digital Analog Thermocouple RTD Medium Voltage Normal Lighting Emergency Lighting Security Fire Safety DC Power Control and Signal Three-Line Type Codelist Table The tl_type table defines the three-line types that are available with the EE Raceway product.

The table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line subtype index number three-line subtype description The three-line subtypes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 index_value <blank> VERTICAL INSIDE VERTICAL OUTSIDE VERTICAL HORIZONTAL LEFT HORIZONTAL RIGHT HORIZONTAL REDUCER LEFT REDUCER RIGHT REDUCER C: EE Databases Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table The tl_qual table further defines the three-line types. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values. You can modify the index_value values._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table The tl_subtype table further defines the available three-line types. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. nor should you modify the index_column values. You must not add or remove rows from the table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line qualifier index number three-line qualifier description 437 . You must not add or remove rows from the table.

You must not add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION units index number units description The units delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value English Metric Vendor Codelist Table You must have a vendor in the vendor codelist table before loading any specification tables in the database. The unit table contains the index_column column. but do not remove the rows delivered with the product.February 2003 The three-line qualifiers delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 index_value <blank> RIGID BENDABLE FLEXIBLE ADJUSTABLE Units Codelist Table This table (ee_unit) defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value catalog TYPE integer char(20) char(20) DESCRIPTION vendor index number vendor name catalog 438 . You can add vendors as necessary to this table. You can modify the index_value values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a vendor name. nor should you modify the index_column values. The vendor table contains the index_column column.

The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. The wire/cable code table contains the index_column column. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable code index value wire/cable code description C: EE Databases The wire/cable codes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX index_value AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX 439 . the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable codes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table code column. You may add or remove rows from this table._ _______________ Appendix C: The vendors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 index_value default sample unknown English sample catalog delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank Codelists Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_code) defines the wire/cable code that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING.

the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable sizes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table cable_size column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. The wire/cable size table contains the index_column column. You may add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable size index value wire/cable size description The wire/cable sizes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG index_value 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG 440 . You may add or remove rows from this table. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable configurations represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table config column._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The wire/cable configuration table contains the index_column column. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable configuration index value wire/cable configuration description The wire/cable configurations delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column \C PR TR index_value single conductor "pair 2 conductors "triad" 3 conductors Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_size) defines the wire/cable size that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.February 2003 Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_config) defines the wire/cable configuration that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING.

The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. You may add or remove rows from this table._ _______________ Appendix C: 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM Codelists C: EE Databases Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_color) defines the wire/cable insulation color that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. 441 . The wire/cable insulation color table contains the index_column column. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation colors represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table color column.

February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation color index value wire/cable insulation color description The wire/cable insulation colors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column BLK W R GR ORN BL W/BLK R/BLK GR/BLK ORN/BLK BL/BLK BLK/W R/W GR/W BL/W BLK/R W/R ORN/R BL/R R/GR ORN/GR BLK/W/R W/BLK/R R/BLK/W GR/BLK/W ORN/BLK/W BL/BLK/W BLK/R/GR W/R/GR R/BLK/GR GR/BLK/ORN ORN/BLK/GR BL/W/ORN BLK/W/ORN W/R/ORN ORN/W/BL W/R/BL BLK/W/GR W/BLK/GR R/W/GR GR/W/BL ORN/R/GR index_value BLACK WHITE RED GREEN ORANGE BLUE WHITE/BLACK RED/BLACK GREEN/BLACK ORANGE/BLACK BLUE/BLACK BLACK/WHITE RED/WHITE GREEN/WHITE BLUE/WHITE BLACK/RED WHITE/RED ORANGE/RED BLUE/RED RED/GREEN ORANGE/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/RED WHITE/BLACK/RED RED/BLACK/WHITE GREEN/BLACK/WHITE ORANGE/BLACK/WHITE BLUE/BLACK/WHITE BLACK/RED/GREEN WHITE/RED/GREEN RED/BLACK/GREEN GREEN/BLACK/ORANGE ORANGE/BLACK/GREEN BLUE/WHITE/ORANGE BLACK/WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/RED/ORANGE ORANGE/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/RED/BLUE BLACK/WHITE/GREEN WHITE/BLACK/GREEN RED/WHITE/GREEN GREEN/WHITE/BLUE ORANGE/RED/GREEN 442 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. The wire/cable insulation voltage rating table contains the index_column column. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 2 wire system) Low (Single phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) 443 . The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. C: EE Databases COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(40) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation voltage rating index value wire/cable insulation voltage rating description The wire/cable voltage ratings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 120 120/240 208Y/120 240/120 240 480Y/277 480 600 2400 4160Y/2400 4160 4800 6900 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13200 13800Y/7970 index_value Low (Single phase._ _______________ Appendix C: BL/R/GR BLK/W/BL W/BLK/BL R/W/BL GR/ORN/R GR/R/BL BL/R/ORN BLK/ORN/R BRN Y BLUE/RED/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLACK/BLUE RED/WHITE/BLUE GREEN/ORANGE/RED GREEN/RED/BLUE BLUE/RED/ORANGE BLACK/ORANGE/RED BROWN YELLOW Codelists Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_volt) defines the wire/cable insulation voltage rating that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation voltage ratings represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table voltage column. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase.

Heat. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. flame. The wire/cable insulation type table contains the index_column column. Moisture-. non-metallic covering) 444 . COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(100) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation type index value wire/cable insulation type description The wire/cable insulation types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column A AA AI AIA A VA AVB AVL FEP FEPB MI MTW PFA PFAH RH RHH RHW SA SIS TA TBS index_value Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Impregnated Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (Flame retardant.non-metallic covering) Moisture. flame. flame-non-metallic covering) Silicone Rubber (Asbestos. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_insul) defines the wire/cable insulation type that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .and Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table.and Oil-Resistant Thermoplastic Perfluoroalkoxy Perfluoroalkoxy Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation types represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table insulation column.non-metallic covering) Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. cotton braid) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (AVL-lead sheath) Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (Glass braid Asbestos or other Suitable braid material) Magnesium Oxide (Copper) Flame-. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. non-metallic covering) Thermo-plastic (Flame-retardant. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. glass or other suitable braid material) Heat-Resistant Rubber Thermo-plastic and Asbestos (Flame-retardant. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase.February 2003 13800 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 23000 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920 34500 46000 69000 Medium (Three phase.

COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION yes-no response index number yes-no response description C: EE Databases The Yes-No values delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 0 1 index_value NO Yes 445 . Moisture._ _______________ Appendix C: TFE THHN THHN/THWN THW THWN TW UF USE V XHHN Z Extruded Polytetra-fluoro-ethylene Flame-.and Moisture-Resistant (Moisture-resistant non-metallic covering) Varnished Cambric (Nonmetallic covering or lead sheath) Flame-Retardant Cross-Linked Synthetic Polymer Modified Ethylene Tetrafluoro-ethylene Codelists Yes-No Codelist Table The ee_yes_no codelist table defines the available positive and negative user responses. Moisture.and Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Moisture-Resistant.& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-Retardant. (Moisture-) & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-.and Heat-Resistant (Integral with insulation) Heat. Moisture. You must not add or remove rows from this table. Moisture. Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-.& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Flame-.

If found.180. The software. and the angles between the intersectin one-lines with the rules in the fitting environment table to find a match. the one-line type. fitting mscatalog table number fitting EDEN symbol name The fitting environment rules delivered with EE Raceway are: olt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tlt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlst 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nol 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 pln 180 90 90. You can add. compares the number of intersection one-lines.180. the symbol in the part table stored will be placed at the RCP._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line qualifier number.February 2003 Fitting Environment Rules The fitting environment rules are the rules stored in the reference database table tl_fit_env that control the Place Fitting by Rule commands. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. COLUMN_NAME ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol TYPE integer integer integer integer integer char(40) char(40) integer char(6) DESCRIPTION intersecting one-line’s one-line type number intersecting one-line’s three-line type number. zero if not applicable number of intersecting one-lines planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. remove. or update any of the rules delivered with EE Raceway.180 90. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line.180 90 90. zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line subtype number.270 90.270 prp 90 90 90 tbl 246 246 246 246 246 246 246 sym CC CLB CT CGUAM CX CGUAW CEABY 446 . The software compares the one-line environment at an RCP in the design file with the rules stored in this table to determine which fitting to place at the RCP. at least. non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines.

180._ _______________ Appendix C: Fitting Environment Rules Intersecting Conduit One-lines Planar Angles = 90. 270 Non-Planar Angle = 90 C: EE Databases 447 .

February 2003 Project Schema . its one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Default and specification information is copied from the reference schema into the project schema when you run Load Database. 448 .General Description The project schema contains information about the drawings that are part of a particular project. and three-lines. RCPs. The schema stores information associated with the elements in each drawing.

not a database name. if one exists. Updating a Project Schema Update the project schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment. If you select multiple applications. Sql and Cmd Files 449 . Given the schema name. if one exists. and to grant permissions within the schema. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. then Update project schema runs each application sequentially against the database. not a database name. No paths are required. INGRES). you must use the schema creation form in RIS Schema Manager to create a valid RIS schema on the database. These fields require a full path to the files. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. you must create the schemas using one of the currently-supported RDBMS’s (INFORMIX. load with EE tables and default data) a schema. Updating Reference Schemas Update the reference schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment._ _______________ Appendix C: Updating Schemas Updating Schemas Before you can update (that is. Additionally. since this is a schema name. views. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables. Given the schema name. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. No paths are required. C: EE Databases Sql and Cmd Files Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. since this is a schema name. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema. using the Update project schema option. using the Update reference schema option. ORACLE. RIS will know where the appropriate database is located.

EErc file to be your project schema name. However. you can override the default by exporting the $EE_SCHEMA variable in your $HOME/. 450 . and to grant permissions within the schema. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. If you select multiple applications._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . since this will be the default name when you enter the project. you should use the same name as your project.February 2003 Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. These fields require a full path to the files. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. Schema Names When creating your RIS schemas. then Update reference schema runs each application sequentially against the database. views.

5. for example.sql" file. If you modify a character column to make it smaller (resizing char(20) to be char(10). C: EE Databases If rows exist in the updated table. 4. these columns will be added into the existing rows of the existing one_line table.sql" file in order to modify a schema._ _______________ Appendix C: Modifying the Reference Schema Modifying the Reference Schema You can customize the database schema before creating a schema or after the schema exists. You lose any columns and column information that you have not specified in the "create table" statement.sql file before Update schema is executed.unl file will always be loaded into a table which has a unique index. The table definitions that exist in this file determine how the tables will look when complete. 2. The removed column in such a case will lose its data and the added column will be blank. 3. For example. 451 . you would lose any data that may have been on that column. If you had used the RDBMS to alter the table by adding a column and then run Update schema without making the appropriate change to the ". then the . Table names can be changed except for table names that begin with the letters "ms" and "ee_".sql file. 1. Therefore. Keep in mind that the columns within the tables in the reference schema must be a subset of the columns of the corresponding tables in the project schema.sql file are the input to the Update schema process. The . Loads new table with saved row information for column names that were in previous definition. simply include the necessary changes in the . Any duplicate rows will be counted and ignored. They must also be changed appropriately in the MSCATALOG table in order for the software to run properly. The SQL statements in the . If a table does not have a unique index. the unique index prevents the entry of duplicate information when updating any EE application. Renaming of a column is processed by removing the column and adding another. Saves rows from existing table. you need only to modify the ". To modify the database schema before schema creation. You can modify the size of a column. but changing from "char" to "integer" is dangerous and an illegal conversion can occur. The following is a list of schema modification rules for Update Schema to keep in mind. columns can be added or removed from an existing schema according to the "create table" statements in the .sql file for the one_line table. 3. columns are added into the . for example). When this process finds a "create table" statement for a table that exists in the schema. the following actions take place: 1.unl file will be loaded only if the table is empty. then any row containing data which exceeds the new character limit will be lost. The . any new columns that are added will be blank in each row. Drops existing table (also drops indexes). Creates new table according to "create table" statement. 2. The new table will have only those columns specified in the "create table" statement in the table definition. Columns that you added into an existing loaded table would have no data stored in them. from "char(10)" to "char(200)" or "smallint" to "integer".sql file is a series of SQL statements recognized by RIS to create your database An existing database schema can also be modified. 4. Therefore.

or INGRES’s SQL. and codelist values. These lines tell the update schema process that the file "olt. Each line represents a row to be inserted into the database and each field represents the corresponding column in the database. All existing . Do not remove any lines from this file that would effect the current . In this case the "olt.February 2003 The databases are initially loaded with the *.unl files are being loaded into the reference database. DB Access’s Database Edit Utility (see the section in the appendix entitled EE Manager for more information on this utility) the EE Database Utilities (risschema_mgr utility – win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\rismgr. look at the command (. The Update schema process initiates the command file which automatically finds and loads the information in the .unl files must be loaded for proper product execution.unl" file might look like: 1|TRAY|240|241|204|0|0|1| 452 . There are two ways to modify existing rows in the reference schema. such as INFORMIX’s ISQL or FORMS. The following is a typical example of what can be contained in this file: FILE "olt. The delimiter is one character long. part data. 4. The .unl" is to be inserted into the ol_type table.g.unl files can be modified before the schema is updated.unl file. — OR — You can modify the rows in the created schema through 1.unl" file will exist in the current directory but a full path name can be specified on this file (e. To see which . the RDBMS’s interactive query product. The following is an example of what a line in the "olt. Use caution when editing these files since they are in a format for loading sequentially into a table.unl files from being loaded. or ORACLE’s sqlplus. INSERT INTO ol_type.exe) 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . FILE win32app\ingr\eerway\db\olt. 2.unl files into the database.unl files as defined in the command file.exe).unl file must not be null for that column.cmd) file you will be using. These files can be edited by the system manager to include additional defaults. Certain columns are defined in the . 3. the RIS Interactive Query Utility (win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\risgui.unl file making sure the delimiter "|" is used between each field.unl" DELIMITER "|". The following steps can be used as a guideline for modifying the reference schema before it is updated: 1.sql file as being non-null which means the data entered from the . Edit the desired . It tells the process that the "|" character separates each column of data in the olt.unl).

run the Update reference schema process to load the specification information into the tray_spec table.unl. etc. separating each column of data with a pipe symbol (|). Edit this file to include any tray specification information you want to load into the reference database. you can edit this file. 3._ _______________ Appendix C: In this example. If in the "olt. INSERT INTO tray_spec.unl" DELIMITER "|".unl file containing your own specification information into the reference database. For example: Modifying the Reference Schema 1|1|4|18|18|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0418SHV|4x18 VENTRIB SHV| 1|1|4|24|24|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0424SHV|4x24 VENTRIB SHV| C: EE Databases 4. 453 . When you have finished editing the . "1" is the index_column value.unl file. cd win32app\ingr\eerway\db Edit the command file rwayref.unl" file you would like to add additional entries. The following example demonstrates how to load a new .cmd. Create a new file in the current directory. "240" is the ee_spec_table column. Make sure you line up the delimited fields with the tables’ columns. "TRAY" is the index_value column value. naming it catalog. 2. 1. Insert the following lines into this file: FILE "catalog.

approv_status This codelist table defines the available approval status values: blank. approved. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available approved status. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". not approved. away_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. Column Name index_column index_value Type integer Char(20) Index no no Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an approved status description. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 454 . See the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type.February 2003 EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway reference database schema. and so forth. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name.

ee_extension: the column used to define the airway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. Column Name ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer real real real real real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes C: EE Databases ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. 455 . ee_symbol: the column used to define the airway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. EE Raceway uses airways to reserve space for the routing of cable or other raceway material. ee_radius: the column used to define the airway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. this column is the key to the row in the other airway specification. and also to maintain connectivity to a raceway system. ee_out_width: the column used to define the airway outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. away_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. ee_spec2_key: if the current airway part is a reducer.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_angle: the column used to define the airway fitting bend angle. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the airway outside diameter or height to the EE raceway software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate airway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_transition: the column used to define the airway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. cardinal This codelist table defines the available cardinal point locations (top left. center left.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the airway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. The associated shapes are shown below. 456 . ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. bottom left. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. The only valid entries are: A. ee_cardinal: the column that contains the name of each available cardinal point._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and so forth). or C. Column Name ee_car_num ee_cardinal Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes ee_car_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a cardinal point description. B.

457 . ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit body part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size_1 nominal_size_2 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_dimension_3* ee_dimension_4* ee_dimension_5* ee_dimension_6* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type* volume style ee_pull_point C: EE Databases vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit body special fitting. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. nominal_size_2: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. material: the column used to define the conduit body material.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) real real real real real real Char( 28) Char( 40) integer real Char( 20) integer Index dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_body This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting CONDUIT BODY. weight: the column used to define the conduit body weight. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. nominal_size_1: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit body part number.

then the conduit is marked as being overfilled._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_num_cables: number of cables in the conduit. ee_jacket_armor: material type of the cable outer jacket armor. style:the column used to describe the conduit body style or type. If the cables contained in a conduit exceed the maximum allowable conduit fill.February 2003 ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. 458 . Column Name ee_rule_set ee_jacket_armor ee_num_cables ee_max_fill Type Char( 20) Char( 10) integer real Index no no no no Null yes yes no yes ee_rule_set: identification of the rule set that applies to the raceway system fill calculations. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. for example NEC 1990. volume: the column used to define a conduit body volume. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define the conduit body as a cable pull point. cond_fill_calc This table is used to specify the maximum allowable percent fill of a conduit based on the armor type of the cable outer jackets and number of cables within the conduit. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_max_fill: maximum allowable percent fill. This calculation assumes a homogeneous mixture of either all LEAD or all NON-LEAD armor types for the cable outer jackets for the cables routed within the same conduit. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.

ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_spec2_key: if the current conduit part is a reducer. ee_weight: the column used to define the conduit part weight. ee_angle: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend angle. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit part number. this column is the key to the row in the other conduit specification. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate conduit specification table row containing general specification information. C: EE Databases 459 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT.

ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_extension: the column used to define the conduit fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.February 2003 cond_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 460 . Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit specification. ee_radius: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the conduit outside diameter to the EE raceway software. weight: the column used to define the conduit weight per unit length. material: the column used to define the conduit material. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_transition: the column used to define the conduit fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size.

ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. sheet: the column used to define the EE drawing sheet name. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. The associated shapes are shown below. The only valid entries are: A.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the conduit cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. drawing_type This codelist table defines what drawing types are available for use. B. Column Name drawing_type* sheet* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null no yes no yes C: EE Databases drawing_type: the column used to define the EE product drawing type. 461 . drawing This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for title blocks and their default column values. Column Name ee_code code_desc Type Char(20) Char(20) Index uniq no Null no yes ee_code: the column used by the software to uniquely identify a drawing type description. or C. code_desc: the column that contains the description of each available drawing type. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key.

Column Name tag ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char(20) real real Char(28) Char(40) Index no no no unique no Null yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the drop point tag.February 2003 drop_point This table defines both the columns you can annotate for drop point symbols and their default column values. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the ductbank outside height to the EE Raceway software. material: the column used to define the ductbank material. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. 462 . duct_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type DUCTBANK. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column used to define the distance between the one-line and the rcp. Column Name ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description Type integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups dups no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes no yes ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dist_down_ol: the column used to define the distance along the one-line to the drop point. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_out_width: the column used to define the ductbank outside width to the EE Raceway software.

Column Name nominal_size ee_dimension_1 ee_area Type real real real Index uniq no no Null no yes yes C: EE Databases nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. The only valid entries are: A. Column Name table_name column_name Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Index uniq uniq Null yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column that cannot be posted. column_name: the column within table_name that cannot be posted back to the graphics. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. ee_area: the column used to define the cross sectional area of the conduit of the given nominal size.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the ductbank cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. 463 . or C. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_graphic_only EE applications use this table to define which columns in the project database cannot be posted back to graphics through the Post Attribute process. ee_cond_x_area This table stores the cross sectional area of conduit identified by its nominal size. B.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_color This codelist table defines the colors that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_config This codelist table defines the cable configurations that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_code. 464 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_config description. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_color description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_color color.February 2003 ee_pcbl_code This codelist table defines the codes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EERWAY Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_config. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_code description.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_volt This codelisted table defines the cable/wire voltage ratings that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_size. ee_pcbl_size This codelist table defines the cable/wire sizes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. 465 . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_volt. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes C: EE Databases index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_size description. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_volt description. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char(100) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an eepcbl_insul description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_insul. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_pcbl_insul This codelist table defines the insulation types that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command.

Column Name ee_code config cable_size ee_color voltage insulation item_no ee_area ee_units ee_code: the cable code of the cable. item_no: the unique identifier for each wire/cable. 466 . config: the cable configuration of the cable. ee_area: the cross sectional area of the wire/cable. insulation: the insulation type of the wire/cable._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the cable/wires that are used in the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. voltage: the insulation voltage rating of the wire/cable. ee_color: the insulation color of the wire/cable. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. system_name: the column that contains the name of each available system. Column Name system_num system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes system_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a system name. Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) real integer Index no no no no no no uniq no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no ee_system This codelist table defines the systems that are available to contain EE Raceway graphics. cable_size: the size of the wire/cable.

Column Name table_name column_name ee_comp_type* blank_allowed Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 10) integer Index uniq uniq uniq no Null yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases table_name: the name of the table that requires single data entry. If not. a row will be loaded into the appropriate table for each graphic element. where the information crosses products. this column is used to further describe what would make an entry unique. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column* index_value* index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_unit description. ee_yes_no This codelist table defines the possible column values for a ’yes/no’ question in a table column. then a blank column value would cause the EE processes to create a new row in the database. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_unit. In some entries. ee_unique EE applications use this table to define which columns make a row in a table unique for single data entry. column_name: the name of the column in table_name that makes an entry unique. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Multiple rows in the database could contain the same table name if multiple columns are required to make an entry unique. blank_allowed: is used to define whether or not the column in column_name is allowed to be blank. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify the ’yes/no’ response. ee_comp_type: is used by the EE processors to define what product will use the entry. If a table is not represented in the ee_unique table. 467 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_units This codelist table defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values.

Space envelopes are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. EE Raceway uses space envelopes to reserve blocks of space for raceway without maintaining connectivity to any raceway system. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes tag: the column used to define the space envelope tag.February 2003 index_value: the column that contains the ’yes/no’ column value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. 468 . envelope This table defines both the columns you can annotate for space envelopes and their default column values.

voltage: the column used to define the light fixture’s voltage. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 6) integer real real real Char( 28) real real real real Char( 40) Char( 3) real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 4) integer real Char( 6) integer Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer integer Index no no no no no uniq no no no no no no no no no no dups no no no no no no no no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description light_fixture This table stores the specification information for the manually placed equipment LIGHT_FIXTURE. Column Name ee_symbol voltage ee_dimension_1 ee_dimension_2 ee_dimension_3 ee_part_key fl_amps ee_dimension_4 ee_dimension_5 ee_dimension_6 ee_description item_type ee_dimension_7 ee_dimension_8 ee_dimension_9 item_code_num vendor num_wires num_phase_wires power_factor area_class oper_temp_deg_c text_1 text_2 text_3 text_4 ee_units ee_pull_point C: EE Databases ee_symbol: the column used to define the light fixture EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. 469 . ee_part_key: the unique key to appropriate reference database record for the default values.

February 2003 fl_amps: the column used to define a light fixture’s full load amps. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a light fixture as a cable pull point. oper_temp_deg_c: the column used to define a light fixture’s operating temperature. ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_7: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . text_2: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. text_1: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. num_phase_wires: the column used to define the number of phase wires in a light fixture. vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the equipment light fixture. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. text_4: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_dimension_8: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. 470 . ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_9: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key item_type: the column used to define a light fixture’s item type. text_3: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. num_wires: the column used to define the number of wires in a light fixture. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. item_code_num: the column used to define a light fixture’s item code number. area_class: the column used to define a light fixture’s area class. power_factor: the column used to define a light fixture’s power factor.

ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. C: EE Databases ee_manpart_type: the column used to tell the load processor to load the manual part into either the project database "fitting" table or the "panel" table. This table holds the entity numbers for all other tables in the database. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_part_table* ee_rcp_ol_type* ee_manpart_type index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a manual_part description. mscatalog Microstation 32 requires that every database used in graphics contain a table called mscatalog. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available manual_part. Any table not directly linked to graphics/EE elements does not need to appear in mscatalog. 471 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no Null no yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description manual_part This codelist table defines the available manually-placed special fittings (conduit body. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char( 64) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. there will be one row in mscatalog for each database table that is linked to graphic elements. In general. Both DBAccess and RISRPT (RIS Report Writer) use this table. ee_rcp_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table for the EE raceway connect point of the special fitting. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. pullbox). It must exactly match the name of the desired table.

MicroStation 32. sqlreview: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. A codelist is a data structure that represents a character string which is then represented in the database by integer or character codes. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The MicroStation 32 database interface places the entity number of a table in the linkage it creates between a graphics element and a table row. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. RISRPT. EE uses this table to restrict input for a particular column to a pre-defined set of values. column_name: the column within table_name which contains codelist values. Column Name table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column* index_value* Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no no no yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column with codelist values. EE places the entity number in the EE header linkage of annotation in order to identify which table the text is linked to. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. The codelist approach minimizes storage requirements and simplifies database administration. and DBAccess all support this table.February 2003 entitynum: the entity number assigned to a table. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. 472 . mscodelist This table provides limited support for DMRS-like codelists.

Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. EE uses the mscolumns information to control display of column information during annotation. code_column: the column in join_table that contains the code values.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description join_table: the codelist table. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. 473 . It must exactly match the column name in the database. will impose additional conditions to allow multiple codelists to be represented in the same database table. The order in which attributes appear on the annotation form is determined by the value in the column ee_column_order. A column that does not exist as annotation linked to a graphics/EE element does not need to appear in mscolumns. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. the work_mode value is set to zero. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. there is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table (for those attributes that exist in annotation). while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. index_column: a column name that. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. This column can be thought of as a filter which restricts the display of certain attributes depending on the mode of work the user is performing. index_value: the column that provides the index to a specific list within a multiple codelist table. In general. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by the EE software. C: EE Databases Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order Type integer integer Char( 32) Char( 32) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. if not NULL. text_column: the column that contains the actual values represented by the corresponding code value in code_column. column_name: the name of a column in the database.

ee_priority_level: an integer value used to define the routing priority level of the one-line type. and so forth). 474 . conduit. ee_ol_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general one-line information. This value is used to determine whether one one-line type can break or attach to another one-line type. ol_type This codelist table defines the available one-line types (tray.February 2003 ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order in which to display attributes on the annotation form. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ol_type. ee_rcp_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_spec_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general specification information. wireway. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the part specification information. A value of zero states that the sum of all bend angles in a run is unlimited. ee_max_run_angle: an integer containing the maximum allowed value of the sum of all bend angles in a run._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_spec_table* ee_part_table* ee_ol_table* ee_rcp_part_table* ee_max_run_angle* ee_priority_level* Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ol_type description.

ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. 475 . ee_ol_length: the column used to define the weight per unit length. Column Name tag add_weight ee_ol_length* ee_spec_key* ee_key* ee_description* tag: the column used to define the one-line tag. panel_descrip: the column which defines the panel/equipment description.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 20) real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes no no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description one_line This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway one-lines and their default column values. Column Name panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_key ee_description Type Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes panel: the column which defines the panel/equipment name. C: EE Databases ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the general specification information on the three-line elements. ee_approv_status: the codelisted column used to define the approval status. panel This table defines both the columns you can annotate for panels/equipment and their default column values. add_weight: the column used to define an additional weight per unit length.

ee_create_date: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was created. Column Name prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set ee_key ee_description Type char(20) char(60) char(60) char(20) char(20) char(28) char(60) Index dups no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes prj_number: this column contains the project number. ee_last_rev_dat: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was last revised. base_rule_set: this column contains the base rule set. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.February 2003 ee_approv_date: the column used to define the date the approval status was changed. ee_key: this column contains the EE Reference database key. prj_rule_set: this column contains the project rule set._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . location: this column contains the location. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key project This table stores information for the project. prj_name: this column contains the project name. ee_description:this column contains the key description. 476 .

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real char(20) char(20) char(6) char(28) char(40) integer integer Index dups no dups dups dups no no no no uniq no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description pullbox This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting PULLBOX. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. C: EE Databases 477 . ee_symbol: the column used to define the pullbox part Eden symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define the pullbox dimension value to Eden and the raceway reports. material: the column used to define the pullbox weight material. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the pullbox outside height to the EERWAY software. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a pullbox as a cable pull point. ee_part: the column used to define the pullbox part number. ee_out_width: the column used to define the pullbox outside width to the EERWAY software . Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_part_key* ee_description ee_tl_type ee_pull_point vendor: the codelisted column used to define the pullbox vendor. weight: the column used to define the pullbox weight. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the untis of measurement.

ee_rcp_type: the codelisted column used to define the raceway connect point type. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table.February 2003 rcp This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway connect points (RCPs) and their default column values. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_transition: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting transition length. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a rcp_type description. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the manually placed fitting. ee_extension: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting extension length._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available rcp_type. rcp_type This codelist table defines additional information about EE Raceway connect points (RCPs). 478 . Column Name tag ee_rcp_type* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_part_key* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) integer real real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the raceway connect point tag. ee_radius: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting bend radius. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.

Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_num_ols: the column that contains the number of intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. ee_prp_angles: the column that contains the non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer integer integer Char( 40) Char( 40) integer Char( 6) Index uniq no no no uniq uniq uniq no dups Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tl_fit_env This table is used by the manual fitting command to determine which fitting to place at an RCP based on the intersecting one-lines and the fitting environment rules listed in this table. ee_symbol: the column used to define the fitting EDEN symbol name to the EE software. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. ee_tl_type: the index_column number from the three_line type codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_pln_angles: the column that contains the planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. ee_tl_qual: the index_column number from the three_line qualifier codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the fitting to be placed at the RCP. C: EE Databases ee_tl_subtype: the index_column number from the three_line subtype codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Column Name ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol ee_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table of the intersecting onelines. 479 . Zero if no check is to be performed.

wye. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_qual. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_type description. reducer. and so forth). elbow. flexible. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. and so forth). Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_subtype description. 480 . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_type.February 2003 tl_qual This codelist table defines additional information about the available three-line types (rigid. tl_type This codelist table defines the available three-line types (straight. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_subtype. bendable. and so forth). Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . tl_subtype This codelist table defines the available three-line subtypes (vertical. cross. horizontal. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_qual description.

481 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 32) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description to_equip This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for equipment pointer symbols and their default column values. Column Name ee_eqp_table ee_part_key ee_eqp_key* ee_description* ee_eqp_table: the name of the reference database table containing the equipment specification information. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes C: EE Databases tag: the column used to define the support pointer tag. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_eqp_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. to_support This table defines both the columns you can annotate for support equipment symbols and their default column values. to_support symbols are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the equipment.

this column is the key to the row in the other tray specification. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_spec2_key: if the current tray part is a reducer. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate tray specification table row containing general specification information. ee_weight: the column used to define the tray part weight. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type.February 2003 tray_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_symbol: the column used to define the tray part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_part: the column used to define the tray part number. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. 482 . ee_angle: the column used to define the tray fitting bend angle.

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tray_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type TRAY. weight: the column used to define the tray weight per unit length. C: EE Databases 483 . ee_transition: the column used to define the tray fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. material: the column used to define the tray material. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the tray outside height to the EE raceway software. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_extension: the column used to define the tray fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_radius: the column used to define the tray fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the tray outside width to the EE raceway software. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the tray specification.

ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name index_column* index_value* catalog Type integer Char( 20) char(20) Index uniq dups no Null no yes yea index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a vendor name.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the tray cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. wway_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available vendor. vendor This codelist table defines the vendors that are available for specifications. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 484 . B. or C. catalog: the column that contains catalog information. The associated shapes are shown below. The only valid entries are: A.

ee_weight: the column used to define the wireway part weight. ee_symbol: the column used to define the wireway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec2_key: if the current wireway part is a reducer. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate wireway specification table row containing general specification information.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. C: EE Databases wway_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the wireway specification. ee_part: the column used to define the wireway part number. 485 . ee_angle: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend angle. this column is the key to the row in the other wireway specification.

486 . material: the column used to define the wireway material. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. ee_extension: the column used to define the wireway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_out_width: the column used to define the wireway outside width to the EE raceway software. or C. The only valid entries are: A. ee_transition: the column used to define the wireway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_radius: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the wireway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. B.February 2003 ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the wireway outside height to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. The associated shapes are shown below. weight: the column used to define the wireway weight per unit length. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type.

numb_conductor: the column containing the number of conductors. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. cabsch_spec This table contains information about the cable schedule for underground cable design. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. 487 . cable_numb: the column containing the area number. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". and cable number ID. numb_cables: the column containing the number of cables. cable number. Column Name revision_numb cable_numb numb_cables numb_conductor conductor_size cable_type_code service_voltage undgrnd_length abvgrnd_length from_equi_numb from_detail not_used plan_assem_dwg to_equi_numb to_detail to_plan_drw_num cont_sta_type quan_term_kits ol_diagram_numb not_used2 remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 3) Char( 8) integer Char( 5) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 7) real real Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 20) Char( 4) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 8) Char( 38) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the revision number.

undgrnd_length: the column containing the underground length. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number.February 2003 conductor_size: the column containing the conductor size. not_used2: this column is reserved for later use. drawing_numb can have duplicate values but the combination of drawing_numb and cable_numb should be unique. abvgrnd_length: the column containing the above ground length._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . to_detail: the column containing the To Detail Number. from_detail: the column containing the From Detail Number. to_plan_drw_num: the column containing the To Plan drawing number. not_used: this column is reserved for later use. remarks: the column containing the remarks for cable schedule. cont_sta_type: the column containing the control station type. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. quan_term_kits: the column containing the quantity of term. service_voltage: the column containing the service voltage. 488 . plan_assem_dwg: the column containing plan drawings or standard assembly drawing number. from_equi_numb: the column containing the From Equipment Number. cable_type_code: the column containing the cable type. to_equi_numb: the column containing the To Equipment Number.

conduit_for: the column defines the purpose of the conduit. drawing_numb can have duplicate values. Column Name revision_numb conduit_numb conduit_for cnd_from_where cnd_to_where undgrnd_cnd_size undgrnd_cnd_type undgrnd_cnd_length abvgrnd_cnd_size abvgrnd_cnd_type abvgrnd_cnd_length cnd_detail_numb detail_drw_numb cnd_ac_dimension cnd_station pow_conduct_volt pow_conduct_numb pow_conduct_size pow_conduct_type pow_conduct_length con_conduct_numb con_conduct_size con_conduct_type con_conduct_length grnd_wire_size grnd_wire_type grnd_wire_length ol_diagram_numb remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 2) Char( 10) Char( 12) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 5) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 7) Char( 12) Char( 12) Char( 6) Char( 5) integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 10) Char( 16) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the conduit schedule revision number. and so forth. 489 . cnd_to_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit goes to. but the combination of drawing_numb and conduit_numb should be unique. conduit_numb: the column containing the area number._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description cndsch_spec This table contains information about conduit schedule for underground conduit design. control. for example power. and conduit number ID. conduit number. cnd_from_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit starts from.

grnd_wire_lengt: the column containing the ground wire length. undgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the underground conduit. abvgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the above ground conduit. abvgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the above ground conduit type. pow_conduct_num: the column containing the power conductor number. pow_conduct_len: the column containing the power conductor length. remarks: the column containing remarks for the conduit schedule. grnd_wire_size: the column containing the ground wire size. pow_conduct_typ: the column containing the power conductor type code. con_conduct_siz: the column containing the control conductor size. con_conduct_num: the column containing the control conductor number. cnd_ac_dimensio: the column containing the data for AC DIM. detail_drw_numb: the column containing the detail drawing number. cnd_detail_numb: the column containing the conduit detail number. con_conduct_len: the column containing the control conductor length. abvgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the above ground conduit size. con_conduct_typ: the column containing the control conductor type code. 490 . undgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the underground conduit type. pow_conduct_siz: the column containing the power conductor size. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 undgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the underground conduit size. pow_conduct_vol: the column containing the power conductor voltage. cnd_station: the column containing the information for control station. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. grnd_wire_type: the column containing the ground wire type code.

491 . drawing_type: the column used to define the type of EE drawing._ _______________ Appendix C: drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. load_date: the column containing the date that the load processor loaded the drawing into the project database. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. drop_point This table associates a row in the rcp table with a row in the one-line table. Column Name mslink* drawing_type* ee_filename* sheet* load_date* ref_db* Type integer Char( 20) Char( 80) Char( 20) Char( 26) Char( 80) Index uniq no no uniq no no Null no no no no no no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drawing table. ee_filename: the column containing the drawing file name and path. C: EE Databases sheet: the column used to contain the drawing sheet name. contains general information about each EE design file. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one_line table. used by all EE products. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description drawing This table. ref_db: the column containing the schema name of the EE reference database. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* tag Type integer integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Index uniq no dups dups no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drop_point table.

ee_duct_cc_numb: cable/conduit area number. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. cable number. and cable number number ID. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column containing the distance between the one-line and the rcp. Column Name mslink ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_quantity item_no Type integer integer integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_pseudo_cable table. This is performed with the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dist_down_ol: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the drop point. ee_drawing_numb: detail drawing number of the conduit/cable schedule. tag: the column that contains the name of the drop point. ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the wires/cables that fill conduit. ee_duct_cc_row: the row index of the conduit/cable. Column Name ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_duct_cc_row ee_duct_cc_col ee_duct_cc_numb ee_drawing_numb Type integer integer integer integer Char( 12) Char( 20) Index dups dups no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. duct_fill This table defines the cable/conduit that are placed in a duct one-line.February 2003 ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_duct_cc_col: the column index of the conduit/cable. 492 .

ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Space envelopes are not available at time of printing. 493 . EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_system This table contains the names of all systems from every EE Raceway drawing loaded into the project database. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* tag Type integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no dups Null no no yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the envelope table. Column Name mslink* system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_system table. ee_quantity: the number of wires/cables associated with the given one-line of a given item_no._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. system_name: the column that contains the names of the systems. item_no: the column containing the unique key to the ee_pseudo_cable table of the reference schema. envelope This table contains information about the raceway envelopes found in the drawing. tag: the column that contains the envelope tag.

February 2003 fitting This table contains information about the raceway fittings found in the drawing. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the fitting. ee_angle: the column containing the fitting bend angle. 494 . ee_weight: the column containing the fitting weight per unit length. ee_out_width2: the column containing the outside width of the reducer._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the fitting. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the fitting. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_out_width2 ee_dimension_1* ee_angle* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_ol_type* ee_part* ee_description Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no dups no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the fitting table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table.

ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_tl_subtype: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line subtype._ _______________ Appendix C: cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_tl_type: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line type. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). ee_tl_qual: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line qualifier. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. C: EE Databases fit_to_sys This table links a fitting to each system of which it is a member. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). Column Name ee_to_fit* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_fit: the column containing the mslink of a row in the fitting table. 495 . ee_description: the column containing the fitting part description.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . entitynum: The entity number assigned to a table. 496 . There will be one row in the mscatalog for each database table. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. sqlreview: an sql select satement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table.February 2003 mscatalog This table contains the entity (table) numbers for all the tables in the EE Raceway project database. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char(32) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key.

This column can also be thought of as a filter. Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order* Type uniq integer Char( 32) Char( 64) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. C: EE Databases 497 . There is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table. ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order to display the attributes on the annotation form._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. Currently. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by an EE user. Display of certain attributes can be restricted depending on the mode of work the user is performing. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. RISRPT and DBAccess use this table for reports. It must exactly match the column name in the database. column_name: the name of a column in the database. the work_mode value is set to zero. there are no EE processors using this table.

one_line This table contains information about the raceway one-lines found in the drawing. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. Column Name ee_to_ol* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* prj_rule_applied Type integer integer real integer Index dups dups no no Null no no yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_rcp1* ee_to_rcp2* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_ol_length* weight cab_weight vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* tag ee_radius ee_const_type Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) real char Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no dups no no dups dups no no Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the one_line table.February 2003 ol_to_sys This table links a one-line to each system of which it is a member. 498 . prj_rule_applied: the column containing the applied project rule._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

tag: the column that contains the name of the one-line. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the one-line type. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_radius: the column that contains the fitting bend radius of the three-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the one-line type. ee_to_rcp2: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the end of the one-line in the design file._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. C: EE Databases 499 . EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_to_rcp1: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the start of the one-line in the design file. cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. weight: the column containing the one-line type weight per unit length. ee_ol_length: the column containing the run length of the one-line. ee_const_type: the column that contains the construction type. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. Column Name mslink prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set Type integer Char( 20) Char( 40) Char( 60) Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq uniq uniq no no no Null no yes no no no yes 500 . panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. project This table contains specification information for the project.February 2003 panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information.

501 . EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description panel_to_drw This table links a panel/equipment to each drawing in which it exists. Column Name ee_to_panel ee_asid ee_to_drw ee_to_rcp ee_status Type integer integer integer integer integer Index dups no dups dups no Null no no no yes no C: EE Databases ee_to_panel: the column containing the mslink of a row in the panel table. ee_status: the column containing the revision status of the panel element in the design file (used by the Load Database process)._ _______________ Appendix C: mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the panel/equipment element in the design file identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. location: the column containing location. prj_number: the column containing the project number prj_name: the column containing the project name description. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the RCP table. rcp This table contains information about all raceway connect points (RCPs) found in the drawing. base_rule_set: column containing the base rule set. prl_rule_set: the column containing the project rule set. Column Name mslink* ee_rcp_type* tag ee_radius Type integer Char( 10) Char( 20) real Index uniq no no no Null no yes yes no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the rcp table.

ee_radius: the column containing the fitting bend radius. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the rcp element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . rcp_to_drw This table links an rcp to each drawing in which it exists. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. rcp_to_sys This table links an rcp to each system of which it is a member. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* Type integer integer integer real real real Index dups no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. 502 . Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database).February 2003 ee_rcp_type: the column containing the codelist value of the type of rcp. tag: the column that contains the name of the rcp. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database).

ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the straight section. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the straight section._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the straight section. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_tl_length* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* ee_part* material ee_description Type integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups no no no no no no no no no no dups no no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the straight table. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description straight This table contains information about the raceway straight sections found in the drawing. ee_weight: the column containing the straight section weight per unit length. ee_tl_length: the column containing the length of the straight section. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. 503 .

ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). ee_description: the column containing the straight section part description. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. Column Name ee_to_str* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_str: the column containing the mslink of a row in the straight table. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification.February 2003 cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. 504 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . str_to_sys This table links a straight section to each system of which it is a member. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). material: the column containing the straight section material. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table.

tag: the column that contains the support tag. Column Name ee_to_sys* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* Type integer integer integer Index dups no dups Null no no no ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. 505 ._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description sys_to_drw This table links a system name to each drawing in which the system exists. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. to_support This table links the raceway one-line with a support. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the system element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. to_support symbols are not available at time of printing. ee_ol_coord: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the support. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_ol_coord* tag Type integer integer integer real Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the to_support table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table.

February 2003 506 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Indicate whether or not you are adding records to an existing file (Is this a restart (y/n).unl to a file called <one-line type>_spec. If you answer n to the prompt. This process allows you to add records to an existing . The specifications available at the time of printing are for tray. You can edit these files manually using a standard ASCII editor or you can use the SPEC process delivered with EE Raceway. The following information displays to the screen: Enter schema name: Enter table name: Is this a restart (y/n) Respond to the prompts according to your requirements. airway. the system will overwrite any records already existing in the specified .sav file. To initiate the process. The two special fittings delivered by default with EE Raceway are conduit body and pullbox. the reference database contains one table for each fitting type.sav extension to the specified table name. The <one-line type>_spec table contains all specifications.sav before running the process. wireway. D: Specs 507 .unl file.unl file or to create a new . If you intend to add records to an existing . SPEC Process The SPEC process resides in the win32app\eerway\bin directory.sav file. These tables contain all attribute information for the available one-line types. key in SPEC at the command prompt. Preparing the Specifications Preparing the specifications is one of the first tasks the system manager performs when setting up the EE Raceway product. while the <one-line type>_part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification.unl) to contain all the relevant data from the vendor catalogs. The process will then write all records to this . and will then write all records to that file.unl and <one-line type>_spec. Enter your reference schema name and the appropriate table name. copy the appropriate <one-line type>_spec. The first step in this preparation is to create two ASCII data files (<one-line type>_part. The system will attach a ._ _______________ Appendix D: Specification Appendix D Specification Your reference database contains the specification tables (<one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec) that drive the EE Raceway product.unl file easily and efficiently. For special fittings like conduit bodies and pullboxes. and conduit.

508 .February 2003 The system processes the information. press <RETURN> to accept the displayed values (in ()) or key in new values as necessary._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .sav file and redisplays the column names. Once you enter the final value for the displayed table.sav file. and then displays the column values for the table name you specified. Continue this process as long as you wish to add records to your . Copy the .sav file back to the corresponding . the system writes the information to the . Each value is verified according to the parameters defined inside the < >. You can exit the process at any point by pressing CTRL -C. in a format similar to the following example (for tray_spec): vendor <code list> () ee_units <code list> () ee_dimension_1 <real> () ee_out_ht_diam <real> () ee_dimension_2 <real> () ee_out_width <real> () ee_extension <real> () ee_transition <real> () ee_radius <real> () weight <real> () material <char-20> () ee_xs_cell <char-6> () ee_spec_key <char-28> () ee_description <char-40> () Key in values to the right of the () for each column value. For subsequent records.unl file to keep the records you have added. It also displays the column values you entered for the previous record.

unl Files Sample .unl files you will load into your reference database tables.unl Files The following are examples of ._ _______________ Appendix D: Sample .unl 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|6060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|6030AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|4560AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|4530AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|3060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A D: Specs 509 . Note that the | serves as a delimiter between column values. tray_spec.

Sample Specification Tables This section describes the required column names of sample specification tables. the spec table contains all specifications. 510 . see Update Reference Schema in the section entitled Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment. while the part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. For information about running Update Reference Schema. a dimension variable used by Eden.February 2003 tray_part. the outside height dimension in sub-units. As described previously.unl files are input to the Update Reference Schema process which loads information in the <one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec tables. the .unl 2|2|5|90|0|A-15VA|VEL|1530AS| |A-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-30VA|VEL|3030AS| |A-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-45VA|VEL|4530AS| |A-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-60VA|VEL|6030AS| |A-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-15VA|VEL|1530ADS| |AD-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-30VA|VEL|3030ADS| |AD-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-45VA|VEL|4530ADS| |AD-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-60VA|VEL|6030ADS| |AD-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 4|5|1|90|0|ADL-15X-90|HRC|1590ADL| |ADL-15X-90|Horizontal Cross 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30R15-60|Concentric Reducer 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30R15-90|Concentric Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RL15-60|Left Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RL15-90|Left Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RR15-60|Right Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RR15-90|Right Reducer 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3060ADL| |ADL-30ST-60|Straight Section 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3090ADL| |ADL-30ST-90|Straight Section 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-60|HRT|3060ADL| |ADL-30T-60|Horizontal Tee 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-90|HRT|3090ADL| |ADL-30T-90|Horizontal Tee Update Reference Schema Once created. the fitting extension. tray_spec and tray_part. the outside width dimension in sub-units. tray_spec table Column Name vendor* ee_units* ee_dimension_1 ee_out_ht_diam ee_dimension_2 ee_out_width ee_extension Description the index_column (codelist) value from the vendor table. a dimension variable used by Eden._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the index_column (codelist) value from the ee_units table.

the fitting bend radius. the index_column value from the tl_qual table. the tray part description. the Eden symbol. the index_column value from the tl_subtype table. * For information about the codelist values. see the appendix entitled EE Databases . the fitting turn angle. the tray material. the weight per unit length of the run. the tray specification description. the tray part weight. the cross section symbol. the unique tray part key. the unique tray specification key.unl Files tray_part table Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle ee_weight ee_part ee_symbol ee_spec_key ee_spec2_key ee_key ee_description Description the index_column value from the tl_type table._ _______________ Appendix D: ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description the fitting transition length. the tray specification key. Sample . the tray part catalog number. D: Specs 511 . the construction type. the secondary tray specification key for reducers.

and Adjustable 90.90.90.February 2003 Available Fittings The following is a list of the fittings currently supported by the EE Raceway Modeling product: FITTING Straight Elbow Elbow Elbow Wye Wye Wye Cross Cross Reducer Reducer Reducer Conduit body Pullbox TYPE ANGLE Horizontal Inside Vertical Outside Vertical Horizontal Vertical Reducer Horizontal Vertical Left Horizontal Right Horizontal Concentric 30.45. and Adjustable 30.45.45 left and 45 right 90 90 90 90 512 .60. and Adjustable 30.60.60.45.90._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

pullboxes. Eden provides drawing commands called primitives. fittings. Symbol Processor File A symbol processor file is the controlling function or logic used to produce the raceway straight sections. The library and its path are defined using the EE Configure command. You can write Eden code using whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read. etc. draw_arc. Primitives allow you to construct complex symbols by using a combination of simple commands (place_line. you should be familiar with a standard ASCII editor like vi or emacs. etc. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. (See the chapter entitled Eden Processes for more information about running these processes. fittings.) Every Raceway symbol must contain a symbol processor definition and at least one of each of the following: Placepoint (EE attachment point) Datum point (EE RCP point) Graphical element E: Eden Symbols 513 . The delivered symbol library is called eden.lib and resides in win32app\eerway\eden. and special parts (conduit bodies. To review or modify the symbols in this library.).). and special parts. You do not need a programming background to write Eden programs. However. For additional information about the Eden symbol language._ _______________ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation Appendix E Eden Symbol Generation Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for raceway straight sections. use the delivered Eden processes.

0) then Call ABORT ( 0 ) Endif Call Begin ( NOHOLE ) Call Begin ( SURFACE ) ! ! ! Add dimension of tray to radius radius = radius + halfwid ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Calculate distances distance variables val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 = = = = = = bendpoint on primary oneline primary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline extension point on primary oneline primary distance to extpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to extpoint on bent oneline 514 . radius.eq.eq.eq. height . val6 ! ! ! Get Dimensions Required to create the horizontal elbow. ! ========================================================================= SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HEL’ #DESC = Tray Horizontal Elbow r8 halfwid. val2.or. val5. angle height halfwid extension radius ORG BND1 BND2 EXT1 EXT2 ARC = = = = = = 19 20 21 22 23 24 = = = = = DIMENSION[4] DIMENSION[21] DIMENSION[22] / 2.0 DIMENSION[23] DIMENSION[25] NUMPTS = 4 If ( halfwid .or.0 . val1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 The best way to explain how a symbol processor file works is to show an example: Before creating an Eden symbol processor file.0 . ========================================================================= ! ! Symbol Name: HEL ! ! Description: Horizontal Tray Elbow. val3. you should have consulted the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide or have taken a course in Eden symbol generation. 0. val4. angle . height. angle. extension. 0. with or without extensions. 0.

Point[0]. Point[0]. Define_Point ( Point[ARC]. Define_Point ( Point[ORG].ne. 0. 0. -val1. -halfwid. Point[0]. 0 ) Endif 515 . 0. Point[0]._ _______________ Appendix E: radius val1 = val2 = val3 = val4 = val5 = val6 = ! ! ! Call Call Call Call Call Call Call ! ! ! = radius + halfwid radius * DTAND( angle / 2. Point[0]. 0 ) 0. Define_Point ( Point[EXT2]. 0. Point[1] ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. val3. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. -val1. 0. -val4. height. Define_Point ( Point[BND2]. Point[BND2]. Point[0] ) ! ! ! Define cross section points Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND1] ) Call Call Call Call ! ! ! Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. NUMPTS. 0 ) Do i = 1. (Point[4]. 0 ) Draw First Extension E: Eden Symbols If ( extension . 0. 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) ) ) ) ) ) Define Placepoints Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[ORG]. val6. height. Point[0]. 0. 0. Point[ORG]. Point[0]. 0. Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1. halfwid. halfwid. 0 ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. -halfwid. 0. val2. 0. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. radius. Point[0]. val5. Point[0] ) Point[0]. Point[ARC] ) Call Rotate_Orientation( 180. 0. 0 ) 0. NUMPTS.-extension. (Point[2]. Point[0] ) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT1] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[BND1]. Define_Point ( Point[EXT1]. Define_Point ( Point[BND1]. NORMAL ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2. Point[i]. 0. Point[0]. 0 ) then Do i = 1. 0. 1 Call Define_Point( Point[NUMPTS+i]. (Point[3].0 ) val1 * DSIND( angle ) val1 * DCOSD( angle ) val1 + extension val4 * DSIND( angle ) val4 * DCOSD( angle ) Eden Symbol Generation Define bendpoints (point2 and point3) and bend origin (point4) Define_Datum_Point( DP[1]. 0) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. 0 ) 0. 0.0.

0) Enddo Call Call Call Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. (Point[4]. extension. (Point[3].Point[ARC]) Call Call Call Call Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. (Point[2]. -halfwid.Point[2]. 0 ) Endif Stop End The first line of this file should always be: SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’<name>’ The last two lines of the file should always be: Stop End This line defines the symbol name. 0 ) Do i = 1. NUMPTS. 0 ) Do i = 1. Point[i]. Point[0]. NUMPTS.Point[BND2]. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. -halfwid. 0. Point[0]. halfwid.ne. When defining parts in the reference database. 516 . Point[0]. halfwid. 0 ) 0. 0. 0 ) ! ! ! Draw Second Extension If ( extension . 0. 1 Call Define_Point(Point[NUMPTS+i]. height. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4.Point[3]) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[ARC] ) Call Draw_Revolved_Shape ( EL_LINESTR. -angle. 0. height. Point[1] ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. 0 ) 0. For more information see the description of databases in the Workflow and Procedures chapter.February 2003 ! ! ! Draw revolved shape Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[1]. 0 ) 0. NUMPTS. Point[0]. 0._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 0 ) then Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[ORG]. 1. Point[1]. 0 ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. the name of the symbol should correspond with the ee_symbol in the part table.

EE Raceway fills the DIMENSION array with values extracted from the reference database. height.ee_dimension_25 E: Eden Symbols These are from the secondary specification (if one exists): 51 52 53 Height_2 Width_2 Extension_2 Spec Table ..ee_out_wid Spec Table ......._ _______________ Appendix E: The symbol in the example defines the symbol name as Tray Horizontal Elbow.... 50 Height Width Extension Transition Radius Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .. .. the structure is as follows: Dimension 1 2 3 4 11 What Three Line Type Three Line Subtype Three Line Qualifier Angle Length From Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated These are from the specification table: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 .ee_extension Spec Table . they are drawn as a surface of projection of a line string.... Spec Table ...... . In general..ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ... It uses Placepoints to define the point by which you can place a fitting using manual placement. and radius from the global array DIMENSION. For specification-driven parts.. while other critical points are defined relative to the origin..ee_extension 517 ...ee_radius Spec Table ...ee_transition Spec Table . Dimension 25 Spec Table .. Eden Symbol Generation DIMENSIONS The DIMENSION structure contains specific information that has been extracted from the database and passed through to Eden. width.... The creation of the horizontal elbow symbol is fairly straightforward given a knowledge of Eden primitives.. Then the placepoints are defined at either end of the elbow...... If the fitting has extensions.. .. extension. For a description of which database columns are associated with what dimensions.. The symbol derives the values for angle.. .ee_out_wid Spec Table .......ee_dimension_2 . The RCP is defined in the active location with the active orientation. see the table immediately following this description.... EE Raceway uses a Datum Point to define the location of the RCP relative to the symbol.. The elbow is drawn as a surface of revolution..ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table .ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table ... .... the one-line will pass through a placepoint on the symbol and will terminate at the RCP. ..

.. .... ..........ee_transition Spec Table ..ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ......... 80 Transition_2 Radius_2 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 . ..ee_dimension_60 518 . 80 What Dimension 1 Dimension 2 . ... .. Dimension 60 From Part Table .ee_dimension_25 The following structure is used for special parts: Dimension 26 27 ............................... ........ ..ee_dimension_2 ................ Dimension 25 Spec Table ...... .February 2003 54 55 56 57 ......_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ....ee_radius Spec Table .... Part Table . Spec Table . .. .ee_dimension_1 Part Table . ......... .......ee_dimension_2 ..........

519 . the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to \win32app\ingr. It identifies those files you can modify. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. By default. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below._ _______________ Appendix F: EE File Structure Appendix F EE File Structure F: File Structure This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway.

The product may reside on any file system. /usr/ip32/eenuc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eenuc/config: /usr/ip32/eenuc/data: /usr/ip32/eenuc/db: 520 . The following files exist under the . EE Nucleus will reside under the /usr#/ip32/eenuc directory.February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .. The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation. Any file followed by an asterisk (*) is an executable./eenuc directory: Any file followed by a slash (name/) is a directory.

etc. EE Nucleus. INFORMIX. The EE shell script sets up variables specifying the location of MicroStation 32. — product. 521 . and then invokes the EE environment. bin/ – contains the EE shell script and the environment process. comments.txt – File containing release notices. — remove. C100 for C100 executables or C400 for C400 executables. — . — EEnotice.def – product definition file. — legend – copyright notice file.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eenuc/doc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/forms: EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eenuc/msg: /usr/ip32/eenuc/sym: The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. problems. and EE WPD. eenuc/ — README – file containing description of product features and any fixes. The files are grouped by directory.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions.

data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — eemgr – system manager environment process. — infxcompress – file used for compression of standard engine databases. — reeprj – remote environment process. — eeprj – environment process. Also kills stray processes. — eeqpr – script to print 132 column reports to the laser printer.sh – shell script to create mscolumns table for reference database. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. — clip – clears interprocess communication left after a process finishes. — dba_shell – shell executed around dba_rpt. and product variables. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. The file assigns MicroStation 32 variables.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — assign – shell script that assigns and exports any required variables. — create_db – create database process. — EE – Electrical Engineer environment shell script.February 2003 — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — EEmgr – Electrical Enginner manager environment shell script. — print. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. config/ – Contains the file that assigns and exports any required variables. — risql – EE reporting utility. — 132_header – file to allow printing in 132 column format. 522 . — menu_shell – shell executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. INFORMIX variables. — mount – supports less disk installation. — mscrecol. This file can be edited. — infx_ol – file used for compression of on-line INFORMIX databases.

txt – less disk information. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. — dba* files – DB Access files.txt – EE project setup information._ _______________ Appendix F: — manager. — lessd. — eepsp. — ustn_tsk – DB Access file. doc/ – directory that contains documentation. forms/ – directory that contains all the environment forms. msg/ – contains EE Nucleus message files. EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure 523 . db/ – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). sym/ – contains EE symbol files.dat – ASCII file for manager function management.

/usr/ip32/eerway: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eerway/cfg: /usr/ip32/eerway/config: /usr/ip32/eerway/data: 524 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/db: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn: /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn/seed: /usr/ip32/eerway/doc: /usr/ip32/eerway/eden: /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source: 525 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source/help_graphics: /usr/ip32/eerway/mdlapps: /usr/ip32/eerway/menus: /usr/ip32/eerway/msg: /usr/ip32/eerway/report: 526 .

— rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. — assign – shell script that defines and exports any required variables. — load – processor to load the project database. unload drawing. The files are grouped by directory. etc. config/ – Contains the file that defines and exports all variables required by EE Raceway and those MicroStation 32 variables required by EE Raceway. and clean database processes.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. problems. 527 . — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. eerway/ — README – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. — menu. comments. cfg/ – Contains the application menu configuration files. — remove.cfg – EE Raceway menu configuration file.def – product definition file. — product. These files can be modified._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/sym: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/tmp: delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. bin/ – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. unload_cln – contains the unload sheet.

Sample . help_source/ – contains the text and source files required to support on-line Help.dat – controls rule check report management.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. This may be customized. db/ – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database.s – master help source file.hp – master help pointer file containing pointers to both MicroStation 32 and EE Raceway Help.dat – controls Eden processes. — rway_bar – bar menu for schematic commands. — mstr_rway. and cell library. — rule_chk. doc/ – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. — report.cmds – command file for EE commands invoked by MicroMenu. menus/ – Contains the all menus (panel and bar) supporting the product. 528 .lib – the Eden symbol library file.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided.dat – controls standard report management. dgn/ – Contains the seed file directory. function key menu. — seed/ – contains the available seed design files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. — help_rway. Attaches the function bar menu.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. — help_rway. Also contains all symbol and icon files required to support delivered menus.hp – help pointer file. eden/ – contains the Eden symbol library. You can supply additional menu files.s – help source file. msseed.February 2003 — eden. — process. — eden. — mstr_rway. — help_graphics – contains the graphics used in on-line Help. — rway. and any design files delivered with the product. Also contains . – – seed.dat – controls process management. This may be customized. available cell libraries.

— rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.ace and an . prompting messages.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. — prompt. EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure msg/ – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands.arc file for each report listed below. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — error.bar – bar menu source file. – merge_pnl – panel menu file. — command.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. tmp/ – Holds any temporary files.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. There is an . — alias.pnl – panel menu source file. — rway_pnl/ – contains the rway_pnl binary menu files.ace)and compiled (.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. 529 . These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — rway_prj. – rway_pnl – panel menu palette file. sym/ – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. The source files may be edited by the user. The software requires this directory. — rway. This directory also contains the available precision input forms._ _______________ Appendix F: — merge_pnl/ – directory containing the merged panel menu consisting of EE Raceway and MicroStation. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. This file can be extended. and logo. — rway_ref. — rwaybar. report/ – Contains the source (.msg – message file containing messages for status field.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. — annot_form – form file for annotation. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — rway. — rwaypnl.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. — status.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 530 .

# Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # Change History: # Added the ability to list/extract user functions 31-May-95 # Compile EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. . # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.. Rule.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.dat report.. reports or rule checks or change their names from what is delivered.dat control the scrolling lists for the Process. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. # # eden.dat print. You may want to write your own processes..dat rule_chk.dat manager. # 531 .Default. \ | Enter symbol source file . rule_chk.Switch | ._ _______________ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files Appendix G Customizing Environment Files This appendix contains printouts of the following files as they are delivered with EE Raceway: File eden. This section describes the syntax needed to modify the scrolling list for the Process.dat file controls the scrolling list for the options available through the system manager menu. Report..0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.dat. report. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. You can add defaults to this screen by modifying the file.%EDEN_LIB%.dat.dat Location win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data G: Customizing Environment process. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.-O. and Output menus.dat #ident "@(#)Eden processes:eden.Path.dat.\ | Enter option (-l=list or -o=insert).bat -c \ | Enter library name .Default. respectively. eden..Path. and Output..1 0.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_RWAY%\data directory.dat 13. .) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. and print. The manager.dat process. Report. Rule.

. # # #Create Parameteric Help Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..bat -u \ | Enter library name ..... 532 ..notepad. # # # Compress EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.. d # e n # .. \ | Merge from library name .%EDEN_LIB%. # # # Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden...bat -eu \ b | Enter library name ..._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . # # | E n t e r e d | Enter symbol file name..%EDEN_LIB%.. Extract EDEN User Function From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # # List EDEN User Functions | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -e \ n | Enter library name .bat -m \ | Merge into library name ..bat -C \ # | Enter library name ..February 2003 # # Delete EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # # List EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%. \ a t | Enter symbol name ..%EDEN_LIB%.. \ \ | Enter symbol name .%EDEN_LIB%. \ | Enter symbol name . # # E Edit EDEN Symbol File | %EE_RWAY% tor. # # # Extract EDEN Symbol From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -s \ | Enter library name .bat -l \ | Enter library name .bat -d\ | Enter library name .%EDEN_LIB%..%EDEN_LIB%.

The password will # have to be handled accordingly.exe -s \ | Enter sheet. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.. # # process.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.-f # # Create Interference Envelope (given name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.Default. # # Cleanup database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.-f # # # Unload Design | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.%RWAY_DGN%.-f \ | Enter envelope name.%RWAY_DGN%.exe \ | Enter design name. These symbols # are exported by the EE environment when a project is entered. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # NOTE: Many processes run off the project or reference schema (or both).. # Two environment symbols have been set up for these schemas: EE_SCHEMA # for the project schema and EES_REFDB for the reference.exe \ | Enter design name. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt. .1 0.exe # # Create Interference Envelope (default name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.dat process.exe \ | Enter design name. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (._ _______________ Appendix G: process..exe \ | Enter one design name.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.%RWAY_DGN%.dat #ident "@(#)data:process..Switch | . # So. any customized processes written should read these symbols in the # process instead of passing them on the command line.Path.-F # # Unload Sheet | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_SCH%\data directory.%RWAY_DGN%.. # # Load Database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\load. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.Path.<password> if a password is keyed in on the project form. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. This was # done to handle schema passwords.dat 13. The symbol is exported as # <schema_name>. . %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.Default..-e G: Customizing Environment 533 .

%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. .%EE_SCHEMA% # # Material takeoff report | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # They are: # Prompt. # # Project drawing list | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # The third field is the name of the report which can be a global symbol # or a file name.. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat # The syntax of this data file : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt. # The second field is the command field. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (. # # report.February 2003 report.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.) as the delimeter.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials by volume| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.Default | .1 0.dat #ident "@(#)data:report.0 (EE Raceway) 6/1/92" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom_v \ | Enter project schema..cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | drwlst \ | Enter project schema.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom \ | Enter project schema.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib dummy %EE_RPTDB% \ | cond_body \ | Enter Reference schema.dat 7. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted. .cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | mto_rpt \ | Enter project schema.%EE_SCHEMA% \ | Enter low range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) \ | Enter high range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) # # Raceway Conduit Body report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.%EES_REFDB% # # 534 .

. Default | .1 0. ..) as the delimiter # # They are: Prompt. # # Material takeoff blank part ID’s | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # rule_chk.dat rule_chk. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.dat #ident "@(#)data:rule_chk. # The third field is the report name which can be a global symbol or file..dat # The syntax of this data file is : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (._ _______________ Appendix G: rule_chk.%EE_SCHEMA% # # G: Customizing Environment 535 . # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.dat 13. # The second field is the command field.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | blank_ids \ | Enter project schema.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.

.-q # Laser Printer 132 columns | %EE_NUC%\bin\eeqpr \ | Enter queue name. # The first column of comment line must be #.SWITCH. # # print. # The command can be any command to output a file. The command "vaxprint" # could be a shell script or an exported shell function.. # #VAX Line Printer| vaxprint # 536 .. # (The path is not relevant)..default.PATH.1 0._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .0 (EE Schematic) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # The syntax of this data file is : # TITLE | COMMAND | PROMPT. This field should be used to pass # information to the command. # # This is an example of a way to print to a VAX.DEFAULT.dat 21.path and switch.dat #ident "@(#)env_data:print. # The titles are the messages on the scrolling list.February 2003 print..dat # This file is stored under %EE_NUC%\data directory.. A file name is automatically appended to # the command as the last parameter. # TO SCREEN| SCREEN # # Local line printer # Local Printer| lp # # NQS print command to print to a laser printer # Laser Printer 80 columns | qpr -t text\ | Enter queue name. # The third field is made up of four parts: prompt.

cmd \ |Enter schema name.) as the delimeter n # # They are : b # Prompt. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_NUC%\data directory.0 (EE Nucleus) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. Edit database | %EE_NUC%etnt -l %EE_NUC%\db\mgrdba_lib \ x | Enter schema name..dat manager.Switch a # The default can be a global symbol or file..Path. .INFORMIX Online | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infx_ol -T compress d # Create mscolumns table | %EE_NUC%\bin\mscrecol. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. # # manager. . # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt._ _______________ Appendix G: manager.Switch | .. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. -s e # # m #Compress database ..dat #ident "@(#)env:manager.1 0. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.Path.. G: Customizing Environment 537 .dat 21.Default.Default.INFORMIX SE | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infxcompress -T compress # d # b e #Compress database . _ r # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted p # t # ..

February 2003 538 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

cmd file (the # symbols indicate comment lines): #ident "@(#)rdmsg:alias. To the left of the equal sign (=) in this example is the user-definable alias key-in name.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" To create an alias for an EE Raceway command add an entry to this file consisting of the alas and the hardcode for that command in the following format: <alias> = <hardcode> The list of possible hardcodes follows: Command Name ———— EERWAY Active OLT Parameters EERWAY Add System Group EERWAY Annotate Element EERWAY Annotate Group EERWAY Annotate Title Block EERWAY Clone Element EERWAY Clone Group EERWAY Conduit Sizing EERWAY Copy Element EERWAY Copy Group EERWAY Create Cell EERWAY Delete Coincident RCPs EERWAY Define Duct Cross Section Hardcode ——– rwp addsysg annotate anntgrp anntblk clone cloneg rtwform cpele cpeleg crecell coinrcp ductform 539 . The alias. The fixed (hard-coded) command name is to the right of the equal sign.cmd # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # 13.cmd file explains how to create an alias for a particular command. the command name key-ins in the file will invoke the commands to which they correspond. H: alias.cmd file. and a list of EE Raceway command names and the hard-code for each command. Since the EE Raceway software has a reserved set of names for each Raceway command which are hard-coded into the EE Raceway software._ _______________ Appendix H: alias. You need to key in just enough of the key-in name to make it unique. just as would the key-in EERWAY Delete Element. you would need only to key in r e to invoke the command.cmd file The following is a print-out of the alias. The alias. You can use any text editor to modify the file. a sample entry. If you were to add this example to the alias. For example.cmd.cmd file Appendix H alias.cmd file.cmd file This appendix contains a description and printout of the alias. The example in the alias.cmd file contains instructions for adding an entry.1 0.cmd file.cmd file is an ASCII file located in win32app\ingr\eerway\msg. any alias you add to this file must not match any of the command name key-ins or hard-coded names listed below. the format of such an entry. if the sample alias entry (in the file below) were added to alias. then the key-in EERWAY Remove Element would invoke the command EERWAY Delete Element. You do not need to add entries to the alias.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Delete Duplicate One Lines Delete Element Delete Group Delete Title Block Design Parameters Display Element Info Display Entity and Mslink Display Fitting Info Display Run Info Display Sector and Word Display System and OLT Display Type and Asid Edit Manual Fitting Exit Fitting Environment Element Fitting Environment Group Group Control Highlight Asid Highlight Entity and Mslink Highlight Graphic Group Highlight Propagation Errors Highlight Sector and Word Highlight System Elements Insert One Line Vertex Insert RCP Levels Control Load Database Minimize Joints Minimize Joints Group Modify One Line Move Element Move One Line Segment Move One Line Vertex Move Title Block OLT Definition Place Drop Point Place Equipment Pointer Place Manual Fitting Place One Line Place Title Block Propagate Element Propagate Group Propagation Control Remove Fitting Remove One Line Vertex Remove RCP Replace System Group Rotate Cross Section Route Around Vessel Run Reports Run Rule Checks Set Active OLT Set Active OLT Parameters Set Active Point Set Active System Set Conduit Sizing Attributes Set Symbology Control Symbology Control System Definition Text Defaults Toggle Spider Display dupols dltele dlteleg dlttblk ueleform eleinfo prtrlnk tlfinfo runinfo prtsw prtsysol prtasid manedit rexit rulefit rulefitg grpform hiasid hirlnk higg hiprerr hisw hisys insolvert addrcp levels loaddb minjnt minjntg modol mvele mvolseg mvolvert mvtblk oltdef plcdpnt plctoeqp manform plcol plctblk prjele prjeleg propform rmfit rmolvert rmrcp repsysg rotcs rtvess runrpt runrul actolt setact actpnt actsys setcsa setgsc symbform sysdef txtdef togspider 540 .

cmd file H: alias._ _______________ Appendix H: # # example: EERWAY Remove Element = dltele alias.cmd file 541 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 542 .

cmd file to be executed. (Place a pound sign (#) in front of any line you do not want executed. This file is located in the directory path win32app\eerway\db and activates the rway.cfg active mmenus ee_rway:rway. You can disable any of these features by commenting out the line(s) that enable the feature. add mmenus ee_rway:menu.amm m. It is run automatically when you enter the EE Raceway environment. The rway.cmd Appendix I rway.) Below is the file as it is delivered in the product directory: m.cmds 543 .cmd The file rway. MicroStation reads this file and processes the commands as if keyed in by the user. If you do not want the rway.ammfile.cmd file may also be edited by the user.pr I: rway.prAttaching EE Raceway Menus. you can comment out the export variable RWAY_CMD using the EE Configure command..._ _______________ Appendix I: rway.cmd is the MicroMenu (umenu) command file that is used to attach the EE Raceway menus.

February 2003 544 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

It is used as a "default" schema to enter DB Access. It specifies the attributes used in the report and describes some of the internal operation behind report generation. J: Reports -l <template library> -t <report template> -M <menu template> -w <where clause> 545 . and print conditions. The EE Raceway reports report on the project database. Usage: dba_rpt [-?] -s <schema> -l<template library> [-t<template>|-M<menu template>] -w<where clause> -o<output file> -S<schema list> [-F<database find>] [wtr_p0].[wtr_p5] [-?] -s <schema name> Returns a usage statement like the one listed above. It doesn’t have to be the schema your report is running off of.. Project Dataview. The name of the report you wish to run from your report template library. This information will be helpful if you want to use a delivered report as a template for a customized report. Documentation explaining how to create and compile customized reports with RIS-DB ACCESS is available in the DB ACCESS Reference Guide.e. This is the library of templates created to run reports from. Any RISsupported relational database. RIS Report Processing A report processor is provided with EE Raceway to run RIS-based reports. RIS Dataview or RIS Report Writer are all supported by this processor. All EE Raceway reports are currently written for RIS-DBACCESS. Created through DB Access. the reference database and. and the RIS Report-Writer Reference Guide. Report templates created through DB Access. This is the name of any current RIS schema.. layout. i. in some cases. Used to restrict the report output to a certain type of condition. or RIS Report-Writer this is your report source code. The name of the menu you wish to run from your menu template library. the Project Data View Reference Guide. All EE Raceway reports are compatible for use with either RIS Report-Writer (RISRPT) or DB Access (DBA). either local or remote. both. "where name = ’joe smith’ and number = 32". is supported._ _______________ Appendix J: Reports Appendix J Reports This section describes each report delivered with EE Raceway.

whatever that schema’s position was in that list (first. A default schema used to enter RIS) DBA_SCHEMA_LIST (schema list the report runs off of) * DBA_LIB (the report template library) It is useful to export these variables before entering DB Access. RIS Dataview or RIS Report-Writer to create or alter existing templates. -S <schema list> -F <database find> [wtr_p0]. up to a maximum of six parameters (wtr_p5). If you wish to override this name. and referenced by the literal string "wtr_p0".February 2003 -o <output filename> All reports have a hardcoded. default file name that they write to.) 546 . and will be picked up as defaults if switches are not used.) This is the list of schemas your report actually runs through.rpt" added to the end.. since all EE Raceway reports were developed with the project schema listed first and the reference schema listed second. and use a schema from the schema list. be careful of how your list looks before you develop a report template. the "-o" option can be used.. * selects one character string from the database based on the select statement entered (i.._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .. Example: "-S prj_schema ref_schema". etc. Thus. The first parameter is read into wtr_p0.) the report template will look at the schema in that same position when it is executed..[wtr_p5] When you create a template. etc.e. The correct order is <project schema> <reference schema>. "select value_a from table_b where. second.. third.") and places the result into the third parameter (wtr_p2)) These are parameters that can be passed to a report template. They are: DBA_SCHEMA (the "-s schema". with a ". Certain variables may be exported.. * (The schemas in this list need to be in the same order as they were in DBA_SCHEMA_LIST when the report was originally developed. (The current standard is that the output filename be the same as the template name.

and sorts them by sheet name. dba_rpt .a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. sheet. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.the RIS process. filename. This file: Selects the desired database tables._ _______________ Appendix J: Project Drawing List (drwlst) Project Drawing List (drwlst) This report lists all drawings currently loaded in the project database.sheet Associated Software/Files 1. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib drwlst template. Formats information into readable form. J: Reports 547 . load_date. Information Output: Drawing. ref_db. Project Database drwlst (RIS) . found in $EE_NUC/bin. Selects the desired columns from those tables. drawing_type. 3. Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) drawing. 2.

Formats information into readable form. 548 . ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_ol_type. 3. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_ol_type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_part. ee_out_width. description Fitting. ee_tl_type. ee_tl_length. dba_rpt . and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. Information Output: System. ee_out_width. Selects the desired columns from those tables. Project Database mto_rpt . This file: Selects the desired database tables. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.the RIS process. 2.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file.February 2003 Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib mto_rpt template. system_name Straight. ee_tl_subtype.

ee_out_ht_diam. ee_tl_subtype. J: Reports 549 .a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_out_ht_diam. This file: Selects the desired database tables. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_ol_type. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom template._ _______________ Appendix J: Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. Project Database rway_bom . description Fitting. 2. ee_tl_length. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. ee_part. Formats information into readable form. ee_out_width. 3. Information Output: Straight. ee_out_width. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_tl_type. dba_rpt .the RIS process. ee_ol_type.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For instance. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report.February 2003 Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. 550 . The output is only for a specified volume from the input parameters. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates.

This file: Selects the desired database tables. Selects the desired columns from those tables. Formats information into readable form. 3. 2.Appendix J: _ _______________ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) Information Output: Straight. ee_part. J: Reports 551 . ee_tl_length. ee_ol_type. ee_tl_subtype. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. description Fitting. ee_tl_type. found in $EE_NUC/bin. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom_vol template. ee_out_width. ee_out_width.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_out_ht_diam. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_ol_type. ee_out_ht_diam.the RIS process. Project Database rway_bom_vol . dba_rpt .

ee_part Associated Software/Files 1.February 2003 Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables whose part id (ee_part) information is blank.the RIS process. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib blank_ids template. ee_part._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Information Output: System. 552 .a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_tl_length. description Fitting. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. dba_rpt . ee_tl_subtype. 3. ee_out_ht_diam. Project Database blank_ids . ee_ol_type. Formats information into readable form. 2. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_ol_type. system_name Straight. ee_out_width. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_out_width. ee_tl_type. ee_out_ht_diam. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. Selects the desired columns from those tables.

and dropping RIS schemas. any active secondary forms are erased. 553 . When you select Reset. It can also be used to display information about any existing schemas. For more detailed information on the RIS Schema Manager. If you select any of the buttons. then information about that schema is displayed. The RIS Schema Manager is a stand-alone utility for creating. If you select one of the schemas in the list. When you select Cancel (X). changing._ _______________ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager Appendix K RIS Schema Manager K: RIS Schema Mgr. This form consists of a list of all the schemas known to RIS and several buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager. and the RIS Schema Manager rereads the risschema file. refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Guide. You can access RIS Schema Manager from EE Database Utilities or by clicking Start > Programs > RIS version number > RIS Schema Manager. RIS initiates that particular action by displaying one of the forms defined below. RIS Schema Manager terminates.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Schema Information Form This form is. It reads information about existing schemas. with the exception of the Schema Name field. or by choosing a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Schema Information form. a read only form. 554 . You can specify a schema in two ways: either by keying in the schema name in the Schema Name field.

Select the Display Databases button. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas for a database. Once you have entered all necessary information. Selecting the Local Machine button fills the Node Address field with the addresses of the local machine. If the selected database type requires additional information. The value you selected originally moves to the bottom of the list. select Run to create the schema. input fields for that information display. information about that database is entered into the Create Schema input fields. 555 . and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. select one of the Network Protocol fields. If you select one of the databases. To change the order of the Network Protocol fields. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Schema Form Create Schema Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. Selecting the Force button forces the system to create the schema despite corrupted data or other errors it may encounter. This form creates new RIS schemas. This is your only alternative if the schema is created on a database which is unknown to RIS. 2. Select an existing schema on the RIS Schema Manager form. A form listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. The database-specific information about that schema is entered in the Create Schema input fields. its value will be replaced with the value of the field below it. 3. Selecting Reset clears all input fields on the form. You can enter database-specific information on the Create Schema form using one of three methods: 1. Key in all information in the input fields.

Selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Alter Schema Form This form performs three functions: it modifies the schema password. you need only to enter the new password. 556 . while selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. When you have entered all necessary information. select Run to alter the schema. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. To modify the schema node. You must enter both the original and new passwords to modify the schema password. enter the new addresses in the Node Address fields. To select a schema to drop. To modify the user password. and the schema node._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the user password. When you select one of these options.February 2003 Drop Schema Form This form drops RIS schemas. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. To select the schema to be altered. This action can also be used to change the order of the fields or to change the order of the protocols. only those gadgets associated with the action are enabled. Selecting Run drops the schema.

column type. Selecting Reset cancels any subforms. The form buttons represent the data definition actions of the Schema Manager. Selecting any of these buttons initiates an action. views. and indexes defined for the schema specified in the schema name field. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Data Definition form._ _______________ Appendix K: Data Definition Form Data Definition Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. A field to search for a specific column is also provided. then you must enter it before the subforms (Create Table. Table Information Form This form displays the definition of the specified table. You can specify a table either by keying in the table name in the Table Name field. and displays one of the subforms defined in following sections. Drop Table. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Table Information form. column name. If the selected schema requires a password. 557 . or by choosing the table from the list on the Data Definition form. and clears the list. The column position. and whether or not nulls are allowed in the column are displayed for each column in the table. and Alter Table) will accept input. This form consists of a list of all the tables.

the new column is inserted in front of the chosen column. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select Run to create the table. There is the usual set. The Create Table operates in three modes which are represented by the three buttons: Insert Column. Drop Column. The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists just to provide a template or starting point for a new table.February 2003 Create Table Form This form creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. The Create Table form is used only to create new tables. In Modify Column Mode. while choosing the Mode Run button actually causes the action to take place. Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. This form has two sets of Control buttons. If the name of an existing table is entered into the Table Name field. column definitions can be modified. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. Once the table definition is complete. or chosen from the list on the Data Definition form. The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. In Insert Column Mode. new columns can be added to the table definition. Selecting the Mode Reset button clears the form mode. which behaves as expected. If a column is chosen in the table definition list. columns can be dropped from the table definition. referred to as the Mode Control buttons. Then there is the second set. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. It cannot be used to modify existing tables. These three buttons place the form in a particular mode. Select the Mode Run button to modify the column. In Drop Column Mode. which is used to execute and reset the different modes of the form. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. This can be useful when creating several similar tables. in the upper right corner of the form. Select Reset to clear the form. and Modify Column. Select Cancel (X) to exit the form. the definition of that table will be loaded into the Create Table form. 558 .

559 . Selecting Reset clears the form. The table to be dropped can be specified by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition form. Once the new column is defined. Alter Table Form This form alters existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Table Form Drop Table Form This form drops tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. Selecting Reset clears the form. select Run to alter the table. Selecting Run drops the table. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. It can only append one new column to an existing table. K: RIS Schema Mgr. This form behaves in the same way as the RIS Alter Table command.

Selecting Reset clears the form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Selecting Reset clears the form settings. 560 .February 2003 Schema File Form This form locates the risschema file that you are using on the network. it provides a Checksum Schema File option. Set Form This form allows you to toggle the database mode ANSI setting on and off. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. and it also allows you to specify which RDBMS(s) your schemas can use. an error-checking mechanism that ensures that the data EE reads from a remote risschema file is correct. Additionally.

a unique key to identify the database The database type. then the schema file is in use. It must be a name or pathname as required by the dbms. This file is the schema lock file. The schema file is accessible only if the schema lock file exists. Multiple files often result in a large number of inconsistencies. It is stored in a central location on the network and is used by all RIS client programs to ensure that all RIS clients use the same set of schema definitions.2 The network address (must be an address. the lock file must be replaced manually. A line separates entries. D for DNP (DECnet). The name of the schema lock file is the same as the schema file with the addition of the . The values found in the create schema option clause. the schema lock file is not replaced as it should be. Currently supported values are X for XNS. O for Oracle. the schema definition file will be created or used on the local machine. not a name) The name of the schema The database user name The database user password (encrypted) L: Schema Definition NETADDR SCHNAME USR USRPASS 561 . In these cases.LCK extension. Although you can use multiple files. and D for DB2 The database name as in the create schema statement. Here is a description of the fields in the schema definition file: DBID DTYPE DBNAME PARMS PROTOCOL The database ID. The schema definition file consists of database and schema entries which are associated by a DBID (database ID) key value. currently supported values are X for Informix. If there is no network address given. Sometimes when RIS is abnormally terminated. it is still advisable to use only one schema file. I for Ingres. There can be multiple schema entries for each database entry. RIS will look for the file in the directory where RIS was installed on the given machine. L for LU6. The locate schfile command in the interactive utility can be used to put the appropriate entry in the parameters file. referencing the file risschema in the directory where RIS was installed. Access to the schema file is controlled by the presence of another file._ _______________ Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File Appendix L RIS Schema Definition File The RIS schema definition file maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. The communication protocol to be used to communicate with the database. The parameters file is shipped with a default schema definition file specification. The location of the schema definition file must be in the ris/parameters file on the client machine. The parameters file describes the network address and filename of the schema definition file. If the lock file does not exist. If the filename is not a full pathname. T for TCP/IP.

one on the Clipper. The operating system that the RIS/DBMS uses.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. The valid value is s370 and the default value is s370. This value is case-sensitive. the other on the IBM. The valid value is mvs and the default value is mvs.135. The LU names are generated when RIS is installed. the name of the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the logical unit that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. Following is a sample schema definition file: CHECKSUM:1249378903 TIMESTAMP:728930074 ——————————————————————————– DBID=2 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample_ref PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b.142.February 2003 ARCH OS ENV The system architecture that the RIS/DBMS runs on. This value is case-sensitive. the CICS transaction name. The name the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the mode that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. This value is case-sensitive. The network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine where the DBMS resides.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129.2.142.135. The valid value is cics and the default value is cics._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This value is case-sensitive.155 PROTOCOL= 562 . The name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM. This value is case-sensitive.2 and the default value is lu6. The environment that the RIS/DBMS uses. NET_PROTOCOL RIS_LU or HOST_LU MODE HOST_PROGRAM A schema file must be readable and writable by all users. There are two logical units. The valid value is lu6. All users must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located.155 PROTOCOL= NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– DBID=1 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b.

only the first protocol in the list will be used. All these entries are created by the create schema statement. they can be recreated by reissuing the create schema statements. Currently. 563 .H:. This allows for additional protocols in the future.zW%wU5yg)U:IeK9tGB6R@Ezn:˜>’k BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=1 RIS Schema Definition File L: Schema Definition Note that there is a list of protocols in the database entry._ _______________ Appendix L: NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample_ref USR=ee USRPASS=pz_-!=%#oa/#@?%qHt%h&jXJ2vj(tyeY%i)pV BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=2 ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample USR=ee USRPASS=’<j8. If the file is corrupted or removed.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 564 .

Once you have successfully entered your password. SYS_PASSW_FILE=d:\users\EEpasswd where \users is the path and \EEpasswd is the password file name. double click on the EE Manager icon to display the Verify Password form. the environment variable SYS_PASSW_FILE must be set to a complete path of a password file. the EE Manager form displays: 565 ._ _______________ Appendix M: EE Manager Appendix M EE Manager EE Manager is an environment created specifically for system manager functions. Make sure the directory path to the password file exists. will prompt you to re-enter the password for verification. see Appendix N. M: EE Manager EE Manager will prompt you for a password and. To run EE Manager. For detailed information on setting environment variables. It is a process separate from the EE environment and should only be run by a system manager or by someone who has a working knowledge of the overall EE system. Once SYS_PASSW_FILE is set. The password file will be created the first time you enter EE Manager using the file name you specified. if you are entering the environment for the first time.

In this Appendix Edit Database edits any schema that exists in the RIS dictionary. and update rows. delete rows. It uses DB Access to query and edit tables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 566 .February 2003 The password can be a maximum of 8 characters and is not case sensitive.

this command finds all rows in the current table. Edit Query — Displays the Edit Query screen. place the screen cursor on the slide bar button. You can place the screen cursor at any point along the slide bar and press <D> to move the slide bar button directly to a new row. and functions which enable you to change. A universe is located by selecting Process Query in the Database Edit environment. which allow you to search the database. From this screen you can edit the current find criteria. select and confirm the Edit database option from the System Manager menu. Field Descriptions Initialize Query — Initializes (clears) the current find criteria. press and hold the middle button on the mouse and drag the button. which shows the current find criteria. A group of rows that match the current "query" criteria is called a universe. Release the mouse button to display the row. or load find criteria from a file in the attached library. Select the arrows to move forward and backward through the rows in the universe. delete._ _______________ Appendix M: Database Edit Functions Database Edit Functions To enter the Database Edit environment. If no find criteria exist. These buttons include various Query functions. 567 . M: EE Manager Buttons at the bottom of the Database Edit form provide functions for manipulating the attached relational database. or edit the value displayed in the field. Process Query — Searches the database to find all rows of the current table that meet the find criteria. and insert a row or group of rows. To go directly to a certain row. Current Row — Controls the display of rows in the current universe. The number on the button changes to reflect the row. save the current find criteria as a file to the attached library.

you can use the Insert Row command to add the displayed data as a row to the database. You can either edit the displayed value or select the right side of the field (a small box with dashes)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Insert Row — Inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. which overrides the key-in mode for Key Columns. with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. Change Row — Activates the Change Row mode. As long as this command is active. Fields On/Off — Toggles all column fields ON or OFF. AND finds any rows that contain both the previous find criteria and any current column value you specify. Relational Operators let you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than. A box containing a list of the various relational operators displays. Fields with these key-in modes are placed only when you customize a screen menu. Add Query — Used with the AND/OR toggle and relational operators to establish find criteria. You can generate a review for all rows with database linkages to graphic elements within a fenced area in a design file. You can also use the Update Active command to enter information for a new row when attaching new linkages in graphics. You can toggle individual fields ON or OFF by selecting the field’s corresponding column name on the Database Edit screen. you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. You can select a relational operator from the list to make it the active relational operator. Change All — Changes the value for one or multiple columns for all rows in the current universe. and Update Active fields. Insert Row will not create a new row if a column is a SERIAL column (INFORMIX) or if it has a UNIQUE INDEX and a displayed column value duplicates the value for an existing row. You can use the Update Active command to enter the column values you want for a row and then Insert Row to create a row with the displayed information. When you are certain the data is correct. Selecting Add Query puts the screen in Add Query mode. any key-in in the screen menu is added as find criteria and is NOT made as a change in the database. The following are the available relational operators: = != < > <= >= !! : equal to (default) : not equal to : less than : greater than : less than or equal to : greater than or equal to : substring search The AND/OR toggle lets you establish either a logical AND or OR operation. Multiple column searches are processed in order. Update Active — Lets you enter data without changing the displayed row in the database.February 2003 Review — Generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. the Database Edit screen has only Change Row fields. By default. OR finds any row that contains either the previous find criteria or any current column value you specify. Delete All — Deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon user verification. When you select Update Active. Add Query columns. The field under the AND/OR toggle lets you edit the active relational operator. 568 .

Database Edit Functions M: EE Manager 569 ._ _______________ Appendix M: Delete Row — Deletes the displayed row from the database upon user verification.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 570 .

Descrip — The field next to this label displays the description associated with the selected Environment Variable. This process is separate from EE Environment and allows changes to the value of a variable in the ee.cfg file to the list. Value — The field next to this label displays the value of the Environment Variable when any row is selected in the list menu. Field Descriptions Enter the EE File Name — The field below this label contains the complete path and filename where the current configuration file ee. Set — The Set button writes the corresponding variable and its value to the list. N: EE Configure User Environment Variables — The list below this label contains the list of all the environment variables along with their path. Variable — The field next to this label displays the Environment Variable name when any row is selected in the list menu. Double-click on the EE Config icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. 571 .cfg is located. Reset — The Reset button writes the contents of the ee._ _______________ Appendix N: EE Configure Appendix N EE Configure EE Configure is a process created specifically for setting environment variables for EE Raceway on a Windows NT platform.cfg file. Delete — The Delete button deletes the corresponding variable and its value from the list.

cfg file. 572 . To edit the values of other variables. continue the same process as above. 7. The User Environment Variables list now contains the new value for this variable. The name of the environment variable appears in the Variable field. 5. Click on Cancel to disregard any changes. 6. 4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The variable will no longer appear in the User Environment Variables list. This same field can be used to add a new variable. click on the Delete button. click on OK to accept the changes and to overwrite the ee.February 2003 Browse — The Browse button lets you select the required ee. 2. 3. if any. Select the environment variable you want to change from the User Environment Variables list. Edit the entry in the Value field. Click on the Set button to accept the new value. the Configure EE Environment form displays the list of user environment variables and their corresponding value. The description. To delete the variable. 8. The corresponding value of the environment variable appears in the Value field. Double click on the EE Configure icon. appears in the Descrip field. When complete. Steps 1.cfg file.

Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. the menus. All network operations (database. Software designed to meet specific needs. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field. character client column command confirm button 573 . The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations. created through NQS. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue branch point cancel button N: EE Configure cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. and then manipulated as individual elements. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. See also path name and relative path name. and the keyboard. A queue. or channel for moving requests._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. it controls the message fields. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. In network operations. An attribute of a database table. A group of columns defines a table in a database. beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. NFS. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). unlike system software which runs other software.

0. the most common of which are memory violations. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. or processed by a specific program. tape drive. to accept previously selected elements. a component onto which a user cannot log. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere. for example. and Z axes of the design cube. To remove. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. A nonaddressable component of a network. coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 574 . and to select commands from forms and menus. For example. though this is not required. Y. Normally._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. and floppy disk. disk drive.0. identify and accept elements. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. or erase. A separating mark or space. place elements. illegal instructions. and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. eliminate. and activate windows and perform window manipulations. and user-generated quit signals. Also known as key-in field. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. Y. bus errors. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. destroy. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. whereby points are located by traversing the X. or Z axis. that is. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated.February 2003 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. interpreted. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse.

including the file name. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. See interference envelope. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. such as a button. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. or a checklist. or positive. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename form full path name N: EE Configure gadget A portion of a form. A relational database management system supported by RIS. that responds to information. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 575 . element. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives. An object (project. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. difference in longitude. A path name that tells the system where to locate a file. a list of the data available for that field is displayed. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas.) of interest about which information is stored. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east. drawing. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. a field. a symbol that graphically identifies a command. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. a relational database table. and so forth. When selected. A relational database management system supported by RIS. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. See also relative path name. A pictorial representation or image.

NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. Network File System. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network. or it can mean the connected system. the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations. Also known as a data entry field. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control.February 2003 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. the Prompt field. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. including vertices. A point on an element. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. A graphic representation or schema. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. the Current Command field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. to which you can snap. a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. and the Key-in field. or alias. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 576 . It is divided into the Command Status field. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. A name.

_ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. and is three-dimensional. Network Queuing System. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. y. having no elevations or depressions. to change the angular orientation. See also absolute path name and relative path name. graphics symbology. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. RDB reference database relative path name rotate 577 . path name PDS pipe queue N: EE Configure place data point plane To identify a specific element. and z-axes intersect. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources. label descriptions. job specifications. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. or indicate a specific point in the design file. vendor’s catalog data. See also path name and absolute path name. the point where the x. In coordinate geometry. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. A relational database management system supported by RIS. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. To turn. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. Reference Database. report formats and other information of a similar manner. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. but is level. The sequence of directories leading to a file. commodity libraries.

A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. This means that unneeded files and data. while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. In network operations. and querying relational databases. NFS. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. All network operations (database. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor.z). To switch. One collection of column values for a table. generally represented as a line. and weight. either entered by the user or determined by the software. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. Language developed by IBM for creating. Views are created with their own x. the software can perform processing more quickly. y.February 2003 row A unit of related information in a table. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. A name that provides access to an account on the system. style. dash-dot. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. and z axes. to change between two alternatives. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. The software uses virtual memory to store data. Data. modifying. A collection of data for quick reference. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. solid. stay on the disk until they are called for. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 578 .y._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See also active depth. The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes. and so forth. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. that are stored in an attribute. including color. The x. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory. The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. The display style of an element. The defined area of vision on a screen.

_ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files. Glossary N: EE Configure 579 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 580 .

235 override keys 179.cmd 529. 233 RCP 178 annot_form 529 application manager information 27. 539 alter schema form 556 table form 559 angle active 256 annotate element 178 access column 179. 527 attributes default 430 setting raceway 256 automatic fit 151 propagation 298 size 151 B background 522 bar commands palette 98 basic concepts database 115 drawing 108 propagation 113 setup 27. 234 by group 233 clear button 180. 235 display toggle 179._ _______________ Index A access column 179. 110 workstation skills 26 batch 522 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 234 select button 180. 234 list column 179. 415. 235 source column 179. 290 activate design volume coordinate system 320 plant coordinate system 320 active angle 256 one-line type parameters access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 save to memory 289 select 290 parameters 146 point coordinates display 121 define 145 active coordinate system 320 add query 568 systems 245 airway place 132 alias. 234 model 285 one-line 178. 327. 550 bin/ 521. 109. 425 approval status codelist 432 archive form 46 option 86 archive project network protocol TCP/XNS 46 remote node name/address 46 asid id display 316 highlight 309 assign 522. 234. 234 override button 180. 527 blank part ids 552 C cable code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 Index N: EE Configure 581 .

271 cfg/ 527 change all 568 row 568 change system parameters 221 changing one-line type 294 parameters one-line type 289 propagation 297 raceway 256 symbology 264 system 295 cleanup database 340 clear annotate element 180._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .msg 529 commands construct point 123 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 Commands Integrated 368 compile eden symbol 349 compress eden symbol library 359 conduit place 132 place stub up 167 seamless tubing 114 sizing 155 attributes 268 config/ 522. 527 construct point 123 construction class display 306 control number 165 set symbology 262 symbology 264 coordinate system design volume 320 plant 320 show active 320 coordinate system 320 coordinates display 121 copy clone element 188 by group 239 element 184 by group 231 menu 43 option 78 582 . 235 one-line type parameters 291 clip 522 clone element 188 by group 239 codelists 432 approval status 432 cardinal point 433 drawing type 433 manual fitting 433 one-line type 434 RCP type 435 system 435 three-line qualifier 437 subtype 437 type 436 units 438 vendor 438 wire/cable code 439 color 441 configuration 440 insulation type 444 voltage 443 codelists (continued) wire/cable size 440 yes/no 445 coincident RCP checks 209 color parameters 256 combine coincident RCPs 209 command palettes 97 command.February 2003 cable (continued) size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 cardinal point codelist 433 cell create commands 269 drop point 277. 279 equipment pointer 274. 275. 278. 276 model 271 library 269.

527 database 321. 276 model 271 menu 39 option 61 schema form 555 tables 558 drop mode 558 insert mode 558 modify mode 558 three-lines 194 create_db 428._ _______________ create cell 269 drop point 277. 278. 332 batch file 335 palette 102 procedures 427 project 115 reference 115 relational 427 report 326 rule checks 329 setup 33 database (continued) utilities 50 RIS schema utilities 51 update project schema 52 update reference schema 55 db/ 523. 528 dba_rpt 522 dba_shell 522 DbEdit 567 defaults attributes 430 raceway 256 RCP key 257 text 266 define active point 145 duct cross section 164 group 226 one-line type 260 parameters 146 raceway defaults 256 system 258 delete all 568 duplicate one-lines 211 eden symbol 351 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 menu 44 one-line vertex 217 option 79 RCP 214 design commands 129 conduit sizing 155 define duct cross section 164 file command menu bar 96 insert one-line vertex 160 insert RCP 138 option 63 palette 99 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 manual fitting 147 one-line 132 rotate cross section 140 route around vessel 135 set Index N: EE Configure 583 . 279 equipment pointer 274. 522 cross section ductbank definition 164 rotate 140 rotation angle 256 scale factor 256 crosses 195 cutback mode 150 D data definition form 557 files 522. 275. 425 cleanup 340 edit 567 add query 568 change all 568 change row 568 current row box 567 delete all 568 edit query 567 initialize query 567 insert row 568 process query 567 review 568 toggle 568 update active 568 load 323.

February 2003 design (continued) set (continued) active parameters 146 unload 336 design volume coordinate system 320 dgn/ 528 directory structure 520 display annotation 306 asid id 316 construction class 306 element information 301 element type 316 field 121 link 317 one-line type 318 screen 93 sector/word 315 system 318 toggle annotate element 179. 279 keys 431 place 142 schema form 556 table form 559 ductbank cross section definition 164 place 132 duplicate one-line checking 211 DVCS 320 E eden/ 528 eden example 514 list functions 355 mode 113 eden (continued) option 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 347 compile symbol 349 compress symbol library 359 delete symbol 351 edit symbol file 366 extract symbol 361 extract user function 363 list symbol library 353 list user functions 355 merge symbol libraries 357 symbol compile 349 compress library 359 delete 351 edit file 366 extract 361 generation 513 list library 353 merge libraries 357 processor file 513 user function extract 363 eden.dat 528 edit eden symbol file 366 manual fitting 198 model annotation 285 query 567 EE configure 571 databases 425 environment 35 forms archive 46 restore 48 manager 565 menus 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 nucleus file structure 520 raceway file structure 524 584 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 278. 234 one-line type parameters 290 document organization 19 outline 25 purpose 19 downloading 29 drawing process 108 setup 110 type codelist table 433 drop point create cell 277.

81.msg 529 errors messages 377 propagation 314 extend/reduce run 125 extract eden symbol from library 361 eden user function from library 363 F field routed raceway 161 filename highlight asid id 309 highlight link 312 files data 522. 78. 527 eden symbol processor 513 password 565 purge 81 rway. 86.bar 529 eeconfig 522 eemgr 522 eeprj 522 eeqpr 522 EERWAY command menu bar 96 environment 59 create 61 design 63 eden 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 reports 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75. 89 palette 97 palettes 97 elbows 195 elements annotate 178 by group 233 clone 188 by group 239 copy 184 by group 231 delete 212 by group 251 display information 301 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 identifying 103 modify commands 173 modifying 175 move 186 placing 129 propagate 194 by group 241 type display 316 engineering units 267 enter menu 40 environment EE 35 EE Raceway 59 variables 422 environment rules for fittings 446 environments graphics palettes 97 equipment pointer create 274._ _______________ ee. 512 delete 216 edit/insert manual fitting 198 environment rules 446 place by rule 207 by group 243 place manual fitting 147 floppy/network toggle 86 Index N: EE Configure 585 . 79.cmd 543 seed English 528 metric 528 structure EE nucleus 520 EE raceway 524 fittings 195. 82. 83. 87. 80. 275. 84. 276 keys 431 place 144 error.

s 528 help_source/ 528 highlight element by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 horizontal spacing 165 I identifying elements 103 IGDS toggle 83 increase size only 157 increase/decrease size 157 information about elements 301 initialize query 157. 290 eden symbol library 353 user functions 355 load 527 database 323. 361 eden user function 363 eden user functions 355 link display 317 highlight 312 list column 179. 119 keys 430 drop point 431 equipment pointer 431 one-line 430 override 115 RCP 431 L levels set active 299 library cell 269._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 332 batch file 335 lock model 282 M main form EE archive 46 restore 48 586 . 567 input precision 119 insert one-line vertex 160 RCP 138 row 568 installation 27 databases 33 downloading 29 Integrated Commands 368 palette 97 Using 369 interference detection 118. 342.hp 528 help_rway. 271 eden symbol 353. 357. 266 graphics environment palettes 97 group annotate 233 copy 231 define 226 delete 251 minimize joints 248 propagate 241 H help_graphics 528 help_rway. 264. 344 introduction 25 J joints minimize 219 by group 248 K key-ins precision 104. 234.February 2003 force 555 forms/ 523 forms maximize/minimize 120 precision input customizing 417 function eden library 355 G graphic symbology 262. 359.

cfg 527 menus 91 command menu bar 96 directory 528 EERWAY command menu bar 96 menu_shell 522 merge eden symbol libraries 357 merge_pnl/ 529 merge_pnl 529 messages display fields 93 error 377 MicroMenu umenu 543 midpoint on segment 123 minimize form 120 minimize joints 219 by group 248 model annotate 285 move annotation 283 commands 280 using 281 create model cell 271 lock 282 unlock 284 model commands palette 101 modify 173 add systems by group 245 annotate element 178 by group 233 clone element 188 by group 239 combine coincident RCPs 209 copy element 184 by group 231 define group 226 delete duplicate one-lines 211 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 edit/insert manual fitting 198 elements 175 group commands 223 define group 226 minimize joints 219 by group 248 move element 186 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 one-line route 204 palette 99 place fitting by rule 207 by group 243 propagate element 194 by group 241 reference schema 451 remove RCP 214 replace systems by group 246 modify element palette 98 modify group palette 100 move element 186 model annotation 283 move/move to toggle 121 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 mscrecol._ _______________ main menu EE 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 EERWAY create 61 design 63 eden 67 processes 64 report 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75 manual fitting edit/insert 198 part codelist table 433 place 147 material takeoff 548 maximize form 120 menu. 529 mslink display 317 highlight 312 Index N: EE Configure 587 .sh 522 msg/ 523.

s 528 N network/floppy toggle 86 new users database preparation 427 nucleus file structure 520 O one-line annotate 233 changing sizes 178. 233 delete duplicates 211 vertex 217 insert vertex 160 keys 430 modify route 204 move segment 190 move vertex 192 place 132 route around vessel 135 type codelist table 434 define 260 display 318 parameters 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 priority 434 set active 294 types 110 output option 89 override button annotate element 180. 179. 234. 52.dgn 528 mstr_rway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 290 one-line type parameters 291 setting 263 P palettes bar commands 98 database 102 design 99 EERWAY 97 Integrated Commands 97 MicroStation commands 98 model commands 101 modify 99 modify element 98 modify group 100 runtime setup 101 setup commands 100 utilities 102 parameters active 111 active angle 256 color 256 one-line type 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 propagation 297 raceway 256 set active 146. 289 part verification 297 password echo toggle 46. 48. 55 file 565 PCS 320 PDS reference model from 372 review attributes 371 review clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 percent fill 157 percentage of raceway changing 221 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 field routed raceway 161 fitting by rule 207 by group 243 manual fitting 147 588 .hp 528 mstr_rway. 235 keys 115.February 2003 msseed.

527 product.dat 522. 65 processor file 513 product menu 42 removal 521. 567 process._ _______________ place (continued) one-line 112. 527 receive option 84 reduce run 125 reducers 195 reeprj 522 reference database 115 schema description 454 guide 25 schema 510 description 430 modifying 451 updating 449 Index N: EE Configure 589 . 297 sketch 113. 533 processes 331 cleanup database 340 eden 347 interference detection 342. 344 load database 332 batch file 335 option 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 unload design 336 sheet 338 processing toggle 53.msg 529 propagate 113 automatic propagation 298 element 194 by group 241 fittings 195 highlight errors 314 modes 297 eden 113. 297 parameters 111 part verification 297 setup 297 style 297 purge option 81 Q query add 568 edit 567 initialize 567 process 567 R raceway defaults set 256 field routed 161 processes 331 RCPs 112 combine coincident RCPs 209 default key 257 delete 214 insert 138 keys 431 type codelist table 435 weight 257 README 521.def 521.dat 528. 527 project database 115 schema description 487 drawing list 547 schema general description 448 update 449 prompt. 536 priority 434 procedures 107 process query 157. 132 RCP 138 stub up 167 placepoint 150 plant coordinate system 320 precision input 119 active point coordinates display 121 construct point 123 customizing 417 display fields 121 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 move/move to toggle 121 key-ins 104 prerequisite 26 print. 55.

535 runs 112 runtime setup 287 display element information 301 palette 101 propagation setup 297 set active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 system 295 rway_bar 528 rwaybar. 487 drop 556 file 560 590 .cmd file 543 rway. 426 procedures 427 schema manager 553 alter schema form 556 alter table form 559 create schema form 555 create table form 558 data definition form 557 RIS (continued) schema manager (continued) drop schema form 556 drop table form 559 force 555 schema file form 560 schema information form 554 set form 560 table information form 557 schema utilities 51 rotate cross section 140 orientation 151 rotation angle cross section 256 rule checks database 329 option 73 templates 546 rule_chk.cmds 528 rwayh_pnl 529 rway.dat 528. 545 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 534 reports 117.sym 529 rway_prj.pnl 529 rwaypnl.February 2003 reference PDS model 372 relational databases 427 interface system (RIS) 426 report processing 545 relational interface system (RIS) alter schema 556 alter table 559 data definition 557 drop schema 556 drop table 559 schema creation 555 schema file 560 set 560 table creation 558 table information 557 remove one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 script 521. 527 rename option 82 replace systems by group 246 report._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .tbl 529 S save to memory 289 scale factor cross section 256 schema 115 create 555 definition file 561 fields 561 description 454.dat 528.sym 529 rway. 327.tbl 529 rway_ref. 550 blank part ids 552 database 326 directory 529 material takeoff 548 option 70 project drawing list 547 templates 546 restore form 48 option 87 restore project from archive TCP/XNS toggle 48 XNS/TCP toggle 48 review PDS attributes 371 PDS clash 375 RIS 115.

_ _______________ schema (continued) information form 554 modifying reference 451 names 450 project 448 reference 430 update 428. 109 unlock model 284 setup commands palette 100 sheet unload 338 show active coordinate system 320 size changing one-line size 178. 234 SPEC process 507 specification 507 specification tables 510 start-up sequence 92 status. 529 symbol eden compile 349 compress 359 delete 351 extract 361 list library 353 merge libraries 357 file edit eden 366 generation 513 example 514 processor file 513 symbology 110 changing 264 control 264 Index N: EE Configure 591 .dgn 528 select button annotate element 180. 449 project 449 reference 449 utilities 51 screen display 93 seamless tubing 114 sector/word display 315 highlight 307 seed/ 528 seed. 235 one-line type parameters 290 send option 83 set 560 active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 parameters 146 point 145 system 295 conduit sizing attributes 268 defaults 256 symbology control 262 text defaults 266 setup commands 253 conduit sizing attributes 268 create cell 269 define one-line type 260 system 258 lock model 282 model 280 model annotation 285 move 283 propagation 297 set raceway defaults 256 symbology control 262 setup (continued) set (continued) text defaults 266 symbology control 264 system manager 27. 233 sizing conduit 155 sizing attributes 268 sketch mode 113 skills workstation 26 software downloading 29 source column 179.msg 529 straights 195 structure EE Raceway 524 file 520 stub up 167 subsystems 295 sym/ 523.

52. 415. 55. 425 replace systems group 246 set active 295 system percentage changing 221 T tables codelists 432 information form 557 TCP/XNS protocol archive project 46 TCP/XNS toggle restore project from archive 48 templates reports 546 rule checks 546 text defaults 266 set 266 text nodes 266 text strings 266 nodes 266 strings 266 three-line codelist table 436 create 194 qualifier codelist table 437 subtype codelist table 437 tmp/ 529 toggle construction display on/off 306 IGDS 83 network/floppy 86 password echo 46. 55 processing 53. 109. 65 tools reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 review PDS clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 tray place 132 tray_part table 511 tray_spec table 510 typefaces 21 U umenu 543 undelete 80 units codelist table 438 engineering 267 working 104 .unl files 509 unload 527 design 336 sheet 338 unlock model 284 update active 568 schema 428. 449 upgrading workstation 28 user function eden extract 363 utilities 303 display element type and asid id 316 link 317 sector/word 315 system and one-line type 318 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 option 75 archive 86 copy 78 delete 79 output 89 purge 81 receive 84 rename 82 restore 87 send 83 undelete 80 palette 102 reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 592 . 295 add 245 codelist table 435 define 258 display 318 manager information 27. 449 reference 55. 449 project 52._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 48.February 2003 symbology (continued) control (continued) set 262 system 110.

550 W weight RCP 257 window to named PDS item 374 wire code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 wireway place 132 workflow 107 databases 115 drawing process 108 drawing setup 110 eden symbol generation 513 one-line types 110 parameters 111 place one-line 112 propagation 113 propagation parameters 111 reports 117 setup 109._ _______________ utilities (continued) review PDS clash 375 schema 51 toggle construction display on/off 306 window to named PDS item 374 V vendor codelist table 438 specification 507 vertical spacing 165 vessel routing around 135 volume bill of materials 72. 327. 110 symbology 110 systems 110 working units 104 workstation skills 26 upgrading 28 wyes 195 X XNS/TCP toggle archive project 46 Index N: EE Configure 593 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 594 .

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200005C For PDS version 07.02.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005B.00. .

...................... 597 Modeling........................................................................................................................................ 613 Mirror Copy Element..... 633 EE Nucleus File Structure ..................................................................... 629 EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) .....................................................................................................3) ......................................................................................................................... 631 EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) ........................................... 628 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16..............................................EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents PDS Electrical Raceway Environment ........ 598 Load Reference Schema ......................... 615 Modify Group Commands (replaces 9......................................................................... 607 Rotate Element........................................................................................................................................................................ 617 Rotate Group.......................................................................................................................... 601 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 619 Rotate Copy Group ....2) ........................................ 609 Rotate Copy Element.... 621 Mirror Group ......2)......................................................................................................................................................................... 611 Mirror Element .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 634 EE Raceway File Structure............................ 602 Modify Element Commands (replaces 9............................................................................. 637 596 ................................................................ 627 Annotate Model........................................................................... 599 Utilities ....................... 625 Move Group................4)............................................................................................. 623 Mirror Copy Group.............................................

Commands Modeling – Allows you to open a design file in the PDS Raceway modeling environment. Load Reference Schema – Allows you to update the Raceway reference schema. reporting. 597 . EDEN symbols. Utilities – Allows you to access EE Raceway commands for EE Raceway processes. the EE Raceway Environment form displays.PDS Electrical Raceway Environment When you select the Electrical Raceway Environment command on the PD_Shell form. and rule checks.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Modeling This option allows you to select a design file to open in the modeling environment. 4. The selected model displays in MicroStation. 2. 598 . Click Accept. Steps 1. Click Accept. Select a design area from the list. The Raceway Designer form displays. 3. Select a model from the list.

If you update the schema with a . CMD File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the CMD file that defines which . keeping column data where column names match. or to modify the tables in an existing RIS schema to conform to the structure of a given .sql file. 599 .Load Reference Schema This option allows you to update the reference schema for the active project. SQL File Path – Specifies the file path of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.cmd files.sql file. SQL File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.unl files that are listed in the . the process loads it only if the table is empty. If a table lacks a unique index. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition. Field Descriptions Reference Schema – Specifies the reference schema for the active project.sql file. — Load those tables that have unique index numbers with data from the . — Modifies existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the .unl files to load into which tables. the command makes the following changes: — Adds new tables listed in the . You can use this command to update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information.sql file that has a different structure from the original . SQL Filename – Specifies the file name of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.sql file.

600 .unl files to load into which tables. CMD Filename – Specifies the file name of the CMD file that defines which .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 CMD File Path – Specifies the file path of the CMD file that defines which .unl files to load into which tables.

Utilities This option accesses the EE Raceway Process. Refer to section 4 and Appendix J of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. Refer to section 5 and Appendix J for more information on this command. Commands Process – This command accesses all available EE Raceway processes. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. Report – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. EDEN – This command allows you to design and maintain your own symbols for Raceway elements. Report. 601 . and Rule commands. Refer to sections 4 and 15 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Rule – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. Refer to sections 4 and 14 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. EDEN. These reports contain information on the project and reference databases.

• This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5. 602 . Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 103-108 in the PDS 7. Mirror. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Rotate Copy. and Mirror Copy commands on the Modify Element and Modify Group palettes • Move Group command on the Modify Group palette See the following text for details. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text.1 version of the document).

This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Palette. 603 . Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu.

then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. 604 . Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.

then selecting Modify Group Commands. then selecting Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. 605 . then selecting Palette.

Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. 606 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette.

Rotate Copy. annotation. onelines.1 version of the document). Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate one-lines in your raceway model. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. copy. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. and so forth). or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and delete specified elements.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 181-182 in the PDS 7. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. then selecting Palette. reviews. Annotate Element — Places. and Mirror Copy commands See the following text for details. to review or edit element annotation. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements.Modify Element Commands (replaces 9. 607 . Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. • The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. including RCPs. within the design file. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. Mirror. and three-lines. then selecting Modify Element Commands. You can use individual commands to move. three-lines.

Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Mirror Element — Flips an element about a specified point in the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. from the design file.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. and elements associated with it. Rotate Element — Rotates an element to a specified location in the design file. Mirror Copy Element — Copies an element and flips the copy about a specified point in the design file. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Rotate Copy Element — Copies an element and rotates the copy to a specified location in the design file. 608 . Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file.

reset a command action. If an RCP is rotated. route one-lines. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. drop points. reject input. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. To change the angle. 609 . and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. All associated annotation. For detailed information about precision input. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. three-line fittings. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. RCPs. equipment pointers. you can locate elements. You can use this command to move one-lines. and annotation. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. accept input. If a one-line is rotated. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. three-line fittings. All associated annotation. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Using the form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. see Precision Input Form.Rotate Element This command rotates individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point.

610 . The message disappears when you identify a valid element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The system highlights the specified element. The element rotates to the specified position. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The Rotate Element precision input form displays. The Specify Rotation form displays. 2. Select the Rotate Element command. 5.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. 3. Steps 1. the system displays the message Element not found. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. Click Accept. 4. Identify the element you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>.

To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. 611 . click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. To change the angle. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. see Precision Input Form. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. You can use this command to copy and rotate one-lines and their associated elements. reject input. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. At any point during this operating sequence. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. you can locate elements. Using the form.Rotate Copy Element This command creates rotated copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. reset a command action. and exit a command. route one-lines. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. accept input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

4. The element copy displays at the specified position. the system displays the message Element not found. Click Accept. 612 . 3. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The system highlights the specified element. 2. The Specify Rotation form displays. 5. Identify the element you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. Select the Rotate Copy Element command.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Steps 1. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The Rotate Copy Element precision input form displays. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element.

and equipment pointers will also be moved. Secondary. If a one-line is mirrored. you can locate elements. select the field and type a new angle. At any point during this operating sequence. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. All associated annotation. reject input. route one-lines. and equipment pointers will also be moved. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. To reset a 613 . three-line fittings. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. RCPs. toggle among the three axes (Primary. reset a command action. drop points. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. To change the displayed angle. accept input. three-line fittings. Using the form. and exit a command. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. To change the displayed axis. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. and annotation. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.Mirror Element This command flips individual raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. If an RCP is rotated. equipment pointers. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. All associated annotation. You can use this command to mirror one-lines.

Click Accept. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the element. The system highlights the specified element. Specify the point about which to mirror the element. Steps 1. 4. Identify the element you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. the system displays the message Element not found. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 5. 3. 2. Select the Mirror Element command.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. The element rotates to the specified position. The Mirror Element precision input form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Orient Mirror form displays. 614 .

Using the form. and exit a command. toggle among the three axes (Primary. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. At any point during this operating sequence.Mirror Copy Element This command creates mirrored copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. route one-lines. To change the displayed axis. see Precision Input Form. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Select the Mirror Copy Element command. The Mirror Copy Element precision input form displays. To change the displayed angle. reset a command action. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. you can locate elements. reject input. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. You can use this command to copy and mirror one-lines and their associated elements. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. select the field and type a new angle. Secondary. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. accept input. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. 615 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix.

Specify the plane on which to mirror the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Identify the element you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. 5. 4. The element copy displays at the specified position. Click Accept. the system displays the message Element not found. Specify the point around which to mirror the element. The system highlights the specified element. 616 . 3. The Orient Mirror form displays. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. If you do not locate an acceptable element.

annotation. then selecting Modify Group Commands. • The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. The following information has been modified: Rotate. and Move Group commands See the following text for details. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 229-230 in the PDS 7.Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. 617 . Rotate Copy. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. and so forth).1 version of the document). You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. and delete elements of specified groups. Mirror Copy. then selecting Palette. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. three-lines. You can also propagate onelines in a particular group using these commands. and to review or edit element annotation. copy. Mirror.

Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Move Group – Moves some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Rotate Group – Rotates some or all elements of a specified group to a new location in the design file. Mirror Group – Mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Mirror Copy Group – Copies and mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Annotate Element by Group — Places. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. 618 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Topics Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Rotate Copy Group – Copies and rotates some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. reviews.

all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. For detailed information about precision input. and equipment pointers will also be moved. You can use this command to move one-lines. If a one-line is rotated. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. accept input. If an RCP is rotated. reject input. To change the angle. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. Using the form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. three-line fittings. reset a command action. RCPs. you can locate elements. drop points. and equipment pointers will also be moved. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. three-line fittings. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. 619 . and annotation. All associated annotation. All associated annotation. see Precision Input Form. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. equipment pointers.Rotate Group This command rotates a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP.

Steps 1. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The group rotates to the specified position. 3. If you do not locate an acceptable group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 620 . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The system highlights the specified group. 4. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. the system displays the message Group not found. The Rotate Group precision input form displays. For groups in Single Element mode.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. The Specify Rotation form displays. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. Identify the group you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. 2. Click Accept. 5. Select the Rotate Group command.

and exit a command. Steps 1. reset a command action. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines. reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Using the form. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. To change the angle. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Select the Rotate Copy Group command. accept input. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. 621 . East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane.Rotate Copy Group This command creates a rotated copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. At any point during this operating sequence. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane.

For groups in Single Element mode. If you do not locate an acceptable group. the system displays the message Group not found. The Specify Rotation form displays. 4. 2. Click Accept. The system highlights the specified group. The group copy displays at the specified position. 622 . Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 5.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 The Rotate Copy Group precision input form displays. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. 3. Identify the group you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode.

Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and equipment pointers will also be moved. All associated annotation. Using the form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. reset a command action. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. To change the displayed axis. At any point during this operating sequence. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. you can locate elements. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. route one-lines. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. see Precision Input Form. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. and equipment pointers will also be moved. toggle among the three axes (Primary. three-line fittings. To change the displayed angle. All associated annotation. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. accept input. select the field and type a new angle. To reset a 623 . For detailed information about precision input. three-line fittings.Mirror Group This command flips a group of raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. If one-lines are mirrored. If an RCP is rotated. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Secondary.

the system displays the message Group not found. The Orient Mirror form displays. 3. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. Identify the group you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. Specify the point about which to mirror the group. Click Accept. 624 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 2. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Select the Mirror Group command. Steps 1. 5. The Mirror Group precision input form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. For groups in Single Element mode. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. 4. The group moves to the specified position. The system highlights the specified group. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the group.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Steps 1. select the field and type a new angle. Select the Mirror Copy Group command. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. The Mirror Copy Group precision input form displays. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. At any point during this operating sequence. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. accept input. reject input. you can locate elements. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. 625 . To change the displayed axis. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. toggle among the three axes (Primary. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Using the form. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. To change the displayed angle. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. Secondary. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.Mirror Copy Group This command creates a mirrored copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file.

For groups in Single Element mode. Click Accept. 626 . 5. The Orient Mirror form displays. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. If you do not locate an acceptable group. the system displays the message Group not found.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. Identify the group you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. 4. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. 3. The group copy displays at the specified position. The system highlights the specified group. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. Specify the point around which to mirror the group. Specify the plane on which to mirror the group.

The system highlights the specified group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. Identify the group you intend to move and accept it with <D>. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The Move Group precision input form displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 4. accept input. route one-lines. If you do not locate an acceptable group. the system displays the message Group not found. 2. reject input. Steps 1. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. Select the Move Group command.Move Group This command moves a group of raceway elements to a new location in the design file. you can locate elements. Specify a placement point to which to move the group. For detailed information about precision input. Specify an origin point from which to move the group. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. The group moves to the specified position. 627 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 3.

Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. however. 3. The following information has been modified: Automatic sheet number See the following text for details. Select the Annotate Model command. 2. Steps 1. the sheet number is automatically set to match the . The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. will prevent such duplication. If you want to display the annotation in the model. If the user does not specify a sheet number. If you toggled Display to On. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. 285 in the PDS 7.dgn file name of the raceway model. —OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. • This command adds or changes the annotation for the model.1 version of the document). Select Confirm to accept the new annotation. 4. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Annotate Model Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (p. 628 . The Annotate Element form displays. The Load Database process.

Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. and Locate toggles See the following text for details. 629 .Reference PDS Model (replaces 16. The following information has been modified: Display. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. then. click Attach.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 372-373 in the PDS 7. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. click Attach. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach. then.1 version of the document). — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. Snap.

or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. 630 . You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. Snap. Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. Snap. Attach – Attaches a reference model. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model.

use EE Configure to verify that values are set for EERD_TBLS. • This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".exe utility in the \eenuc\bin folder to add the new pds_east. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table.EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 487 and 500 in the PDS 7.2. and pds_elev columns to the panel and msconfig tables of the existing project database.exe file See the following text for details. PROJECT_LOCATION. Note: For project databases created with EE Raceway versions prior to 7. it is necessary to use the ee72upg. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 631 . panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. pds_north.1 version of the document). and EE_SCHEMA. Before running the upgrade utility. The following information has been modified: PDS coordinates in Panel table • Note about ee72upg. Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name.

ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 pds_east pds_north pds_elev real real real no no no yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. 632 . panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed.

• This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to /win32app/ingr/. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. By default.EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 529-540 in the PDS 7. It identifies those files you can modify. The following information has been modified: Windows folder listings replace CLIX directory structure See the following text for details. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below.1 version of the document). 633 .

. The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation. The product may reside on any file system.\eenuc directory: \eenuc \eenuc\bin \eenuc\data \eenuc\db \eenuc\doc \eenuc\font \eenuc\forms 634 . EE Nucleus will reside under the win32app\ingr\eenuc directory. The following files exist under the .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line.

— dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. bin – contains the EE executable files and the environment process.txt – File containing release notices.exe – command used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine.txt– copyright notice file.\eenuc\help \eenuc\msg \eenuc\share \eenuc\sym The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. and EE Raceway. — EEnotice.txt – file containing description of product features and any fixes. EE Nucleus. The files are grouped by directory. — . eenuc — readme. problems. comments.cmd – command executed around dba_rpt. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. 635 . The EE executable files set up variables specifying the location of MicroStation. INFORMIX. — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. etc. — dba_shell. — remove. — create_db – create database process. — license. and then invokes the EE environment.

cmd – command executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process.cmd – command to create mscolumns table for reference database.exe – environment process.dat – ASCII file for output file management. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. db – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). 636 . doc – directory that contains documentation. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. — manager. share sym – contains EE symbol files.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — ee72upg. — print. — menu_shel. — reeprj – remote environment process.bat – batch file to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. forms – directory that contains all the environment forms. — Eemgr.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — dba* files – DB Access files. — eeqpr.exe – Electrical Engineer manager environment executable.exe – executable command that updates the EE Raceway Project Database. — mscrecol. — eeprj. help msg – contains EE Nucleus message files.

\eerway \eerway\bin \eerway\data \eerway\db \eerway\dgn 637 .EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

comments.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 \eerway\doc \eerway\eden \eerway\mdlapps \eerway\msg \eerway\report \eerway\sym \eerway\tmp Delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. eerway — readme.txt – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. etc. The files are grouped by directory. 638 . problems.

db – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database.dat – controls process management. Also contains . unload drawing. — eden. — load – processor to load the project database. 639 . available cell libraries.dgn – displays the structure of the EE Schema. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. — report.dat – controls Eden processes.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. and clean database processes. — rule_chk.dat – controls rule check report management. Sample .— remove. dgn – Contains the seed file directory. These files can be modified. — process.dat – controls standard report management. bin – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. and any design files delivered with the product.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. — rway_schma.exe – executable file used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. — unload_cln – contains the unload sheet.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_view.dgn – explains the structure of the Raceway views. 640 .

This file can be extended. mdlapps msg – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. — command. — seed. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — eden. eden – contains the Eden symbol library. — error.— seed – contains the available seed design files.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.lib – the Eden symbol library file. This may be customized.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. — alias. — prompt. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. — msseed. 641 . doc – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. This may be customized.

— rwaybar. 642 .sym – symbol file for the bar menu. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. sym – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. report – Contains the source (. This directory also contains the available precision input forms.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables.ace)and compiled (.msg – message file containing messages for status field.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_prj. tmp – Holds any temporary files. — status. There is an .arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library. The source files may be edited by the user.sym – symbol file for the panel menu.ace and an . — rwaypnl. and logo.arc file for each report listed below. prompting messages. The software requires this directory. — rway_ref.

599 utilities. 610 Rotate Group command. 606 PDS reference model. 620 rotate copy. 601 643 . 630 Load Reference Schema command. 618 move. 614 mirror copy. 602 EERway. 614 Mirror Group command. 616 Mirror Copy Group command. 630 Reference PDS Model command. 628 rotate. 612 file structure EE. 608 Modify Group commands. 638 group mirror. 624 mirror copy. 606. 635 Raceway file structure. 599 Mirror Copy Element command. 607 setup. 602 model commands. 604. 626 Mirror Element command. 624 model annotate. 629 Modify Element commands. 629 EE file structure. 622 Rotate Element command. 618 Move Group command. 599 Rotate Copy Element command. 622 intergrated commands Reference PDS Model.Index annotate model. 604 design. 629 Annotate Model command. 605 EE Raceway. 620 schema load reference. 607 modify. 638 element mirror. 610. 630 reference schema load. 608 rotate copy. 626 modify. 618 runtime setup. 602 Intergrated Commands. 628 palettes bar commands. 634 Nucleus file structure. 616 modify. 605 modify element. 608 modify group. 635 EE Raceway. 634 EE Nucleus. 612 Rotate Copy Group command.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful